Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in Utils
      1 //===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
      2 //
      3 // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
      4 // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
      5 // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
      6 //
      7 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
      8 //
      9 // Peephole optimize the CFG.
     10 //
     11 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
     12 
     13 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
     14 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
     15 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
     16 #include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h"
     17 #include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
     18 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
     19 #include "llvm/ADT/ScopeExit.h"
     20 #include "llvm/ADT/Sequence.h"
     21 #include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
     22 #include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
     23 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
     24 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
     25 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
     26 #include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
     27 #include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
     28 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
     29 #include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
     30 #include "llvm/Analysis/GuardUtils.h"
     31 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
     32 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSA.h"
     33 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSAUpdater.h"
     34 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
     35 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
     36 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
     37 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
     38 #include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
     39 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
     40 #include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
     41 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
     42 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
     43 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
     44 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
     45 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
     46 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
     47 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
     48 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
     49 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
     50 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
     51 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
     52 #include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
     53 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
     54 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
     55 #include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
     56 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
     57 #include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
     58 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
     59 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
     60 #include "llvm/IR/PseudoProbe.h"
     61 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
     62 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
     63 #include "llvm/IR/User.h"
     64 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
     65 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
     66 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
     67 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
     68 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
     69 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
     70 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
     71 #include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
     72 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
     73 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
     74 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
     75 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
     76 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SSAUpdater.h"
     77 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
     78 #include <algorithm>
     79 #include <cassert>
     80 #include <climits>
     81 #include <cstddef>
     82 #include <cstdint>
     83 #include <iterator>
     84 #include <map>
     85 #include <set>
     86 #include <tuple>
     87 #include <utility>
     88 #include <vector>
     89 
     90 using namespace llvm;
     91 using namespace PatternMatch;
     92 
     93 #define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
     94 
     95 cl::opt<bool> llvm::RequireAndPreserveDomTree(
     96     "simplifycfg-require-and-preserve-domtree", cl::Hidden, cl::ZeroOrMore,
     97     cl::init(false),
     98     cl::desc("Temorary development switch used to gradually uplift SimplifyCFG "
     99              "into preserving DomTree,"));
    100 
    101 // Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
    102 // a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
    103 // To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
    104 // minimum reasonable default.
    105 static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
    106     "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
    107     cl::desc(
    108         "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
    109 
    110 static cl::opt<unsigned> TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold(
    111     "two-entry-phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(4),
    112     cl::desc("Control the maximal total instruction cost that we are willing "
    113              "to speculatively execute to fold a 2-entry PHI node into a "
    114              "select (default = 4)"));
    115 
    116 static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
    117     "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
    118     cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
    119 
    120 static cl::opt<bool>
    121     HoistCommon("simplifycfg-hoist-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
    122                 cl::desc("Hoist common instructions up to the parent block"));
    123 
    124 static cl::opt<bool>
    125     SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
    126                cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
    127 
    128 static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
    129     "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
    130     cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
    131 
    132 static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
    133     "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
    134     cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
    135              "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
    136              "predicated store"));
    137 
    138 static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
    139     "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
    140     cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
    141              "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
    142 
    143 static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
    144     "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
    145     cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
    146              "executed"));
    147 
    148 static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
    149     "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
    150     cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
    151              "speculatively executed instructions"));
    152 
    153 static cl::opt<int>
    154     MaxSmallBlockSize("simplifycfg-max-small-block-size", cl::Hidden,
    155                       cl::init(10),
    156                       cl::desc("Max size of a block which is still considered "
    157                                "small enough to thread through"));
    158 
    159 // Two is chosen to allow one negation and a logical combine.
    160 static cl::opt<unsigned>
    161     BranchFoldThreshold("simplifycfg-branch-fold-threshold", cl::Hidden,
    162                         cl::init(2),
    163                         cl::desc("Maximum cost of combining conditions when "
    164                                  "folding branches"));
    165 
    166 STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
    167 STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
    168           "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
    169 STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
    170           "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
    171 STATISTIC(
    172     NumLookupTablesHoles,
    173     "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
    174 STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
    175 STATISTIC(NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors,
    176           "Number of value comparisons folded into predecessor basic blocks");
    177 STATISTIC(NumFoldBranchToCommonDest,
    178           "Number of branches folded into predecessor basic block");
    179 STATISTIC(
    180     NumHoistCommonCode,
    181     "Number of common instruction 'blocks' hoisted up to the begin block");
    182 STATISTIC(NumHoistCommonInstrs,
    183           "Number of common instructions hoisted up to the begin block");
    184 STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonCode,
    185           "Number of common instruction 'blocks' sunk down to the end block");
    186 STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonInstrs,
    187           "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
    188 STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
    189 STATISTIC(NumInvokes,
    190           "Number of invokes with empty resume blocks simplified into calls");
    191 
    192 namespace {
    193 
    194 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
    195 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
    196 // cases composing the case group.
    197 using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
    198     SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
    199 
    200 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
    201 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
    202 // switch for that PHI.
    203 using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
    204 
    205 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
    206 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
    207   ConstantInt *Value;
    208   BasicBlock *Dest;
    209 
    210   ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
    211       : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
    212 
    213   bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
    214     // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
    215     return Value < RHS.Value;
    216   }
    217 
    218   bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
    219 };
    220 
    221 class SimplifyCFGOpt {
    222   const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
    223   DomTreeUpdater *DTU;
    224   const DataLayout &DL;
    225   ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders;
    226   const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
    227   bool Resimplify;
    228 
    229   Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
    230   BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
    231       Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
    232   bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
    233                                                      BasicBlock *Pred,
    234                                                      IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    235   bool PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(Instruction *TI, Value *&CV,
    236                                                     Instruction *PTI,
    237                                                     IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    238   bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
    239                                            IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    240 
    241   bool simplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    242   bool simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    243   bool simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
    244   bool simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
    245   bool simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
    246   bool simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
    247   bool simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    248   bool simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
    249   bool simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    250   bool simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    251   bool simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    252   bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    253 
    254   bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
    255                                              IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    256 
    257   bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
    258                              bool EqTermsOnly);
    259   bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
    260                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI);
    261   bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
    262                                   BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
    263                                   uint32_t TrueWeight, uint32_t FalseWeight);
    264   bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
    265                                  const DataLayout &DL);
    266   bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select);
    267   bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI);
    268   bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
    269 
    270 public:
    271   SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
    272                  const DataLayout &DL, ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders,
    273                  const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
    274       : TTI(TTI), DTU(DTU), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {
    275     assert((!DTU || !DTU->hasPostDomTree()) &&
    276            "SimplifyCFG is not yet capable of maintaining validity of a "
    277            "PostDomTree, so don't ask for it.");
    278   }
    279 
    280   bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
    281   bool simplifyOnceImpl(BasicBlock *BB);
    282   bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
    283 
    284   // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
    285   bool requestResimplify() {
    286     Resimplify = true;
    287     return true;
    288   }
    289 };
    290 
    291 } // end anonymous namespace
    292 
    293 /// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
    294 /// terminator instructions together.
    295 static bool
    296 SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
    297                        SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
    298   if (SI1 == SI2)
    299     return false; // Can't merge with self!
    300 
    301   // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
    302   // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
    303   // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
    304   BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
    305   BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
    306 
    307   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
    308   bool Fail = false;
    309   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
    310     if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
    311       for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
    312         PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
    313         if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
    314             PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
    315           if (FailBlocks)
    316             FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
    317           Fail = true;
    318         }
    319       }
    320 
    321   return !Fail;
    322 }
    323 
    324 /// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
    325 /// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
    326 /// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
    327 /// of Succ.
    328 static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
    329                                   BasicBlock *ExistPred,
    330                                   MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
    331   for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
    332     PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
    333   if (MSSAU)
    334     if (auto *MPhi = MSSAU->getMemorySSA()->getMemoryAccess(Succ))
    335       MPhi->addIncoming(MPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
    336 }
    337 
    338 /// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
    339 /// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
    340 /// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
    341 /// expensive.
    342 static InstructionCost computeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
    343                                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
    344   assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
    345          "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
    346   return TTI.getUserCost(I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
    347 }
    348 
    349 /// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
    350 /// return true if the specified value dominates the block.  We
    351 /// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
    352 /// which works well enough for us.
    353 ///
    354 /// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
    355 /// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
    356 /// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than Budget and
    357 /// are non-trapping.  If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
    358 /// set and true is returned.
    359 ///
    360 /// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
    361 /// Select whose cost is 2.
    362 ///
    363 /// After this function returns, Cost is increased by the cost of
    364 /// V plus its non-dominating operands.  If that cost is greater than
    365 /// Budget, false is returned and Cost is undefined.
    366 static bool dominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
    367                                 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
    368                                 InstructionCost &Cost,
    369                                 InstructionCost Budget,
    370                                 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
    371                                 unsigned Depth = 0) {
    372   // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
    373   // so limit the recursion depth.
    374   // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
    375   // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
    376   if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
    377     return false;
    378 
    379   Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
    380   if (!I) {
    381     // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
    382     // can be executed unconditionally.
    383     if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
    384       if (C->canTrap())
    385         return false;
    386     return true;
    387   }
    388   BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
    389 
    390   // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
    391   // the bottom of this block.
    392   if (PBB == BB)
    393     return false;
    394 
    395   // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
    396   // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
    397   // statement".  If not, it definitely dominates the region.
    398   BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
    399   if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
    400     return true;
    401 
    402   // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
    403   if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
    404     return true;
    405 
    406   // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition".  Check to
    407   // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
    408   // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition.  If so, hoist it out.
    409   if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
    410     return false;
    411 
    412   Cost += computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
    413 
    414   // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
    415   // (as long as it is safe to do so).
    416   // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
    417   // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
    418   // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
    419   // enabled further IR optimizations.
    420   if (Cost > Budget &&
    421       (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0 ||
    422        !Cost.isValid()))
    423     return false;
    424 
    425   // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
    426   // not take us over the cost threshold.
    427   for (Use &Op : I->operands())
    428     if (!dominatesMergePoint(Op, BB, AggressiveInsts, Cost, Budget, TTI,
    429                              Depth + 1))
    430       return false;
    431   // Okay, it's safe to do this!  Remember this instruction.
    432   AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
    433   return true;
    434 }
    435 
    436 /// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
    437 /// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
    438 static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
    439   // Normal constant int.
    440   ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
    441   if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
    442     return CI;
    443 
    444   // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
    445   // ConstantInt if possible.
    446   IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
    447 
    448   // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
    449   if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
    450     return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
    451 
    452   // IntToPtr const int.
    453   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
    454     if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
    455       if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
    456         // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
    457         if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
    458           return CI;
    459         else
    460           return cast<ConstantInt>(
    461               ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
    462       }
    463   return nullptr;
    464 }
    465 
    466 namespace {
    467 
    468 /// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
    469 /// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
    470 /// structure.
    471 /// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
    472 /// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
    473 /// representing the different cases for the switch.
    474 /// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
    475 /// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
    476 /// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
    477 /// fail.
    478 struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
    479   const DataLayout &DL;
    480 
    481   /// Value found for the switch comparison
    482   Value *CompValue = nullptr;
    483 
    484   /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
    485   Value *Extra = nullptr;
    486 
    487   /// Set of integers to match in switch
    488   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
    489 
    490   /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
    491   unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
    492 
    493   /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
    494   ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
    495     gather(Cond);
    496   }
    497 
    498   ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
    499   ConstantComparesGatherer &
    500   operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
    501 
    502 private:
    503   /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
    504   /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
    505   bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
    506     if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
    507       return false;
    508     CompValue = NewVal;
    509     return (CompValue != nullptr);
    510   }
    511 
    512   /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
    513   /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
    514   /// match depending on isEQ).
    515   /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
    516   /// against is placed in CompValue.
    517   /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
    518   /// is found but the value compared to is different.
    519   bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
    520     // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
    521     ICmpInst *ICI;
    522     ConstantInt *C;
    523     if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
    524           (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
    525       return false;
    526     }
    527 
    528     Value *RHSVal;
    529     const APInt *RHSC;
    530 
    531     // Pattern match a special case
    532     // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
    533     // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
    534     if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
    535       // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
    536       // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
    537 
    538       /*
    539          ONE  : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
    540          x    : BITVECTOR(64);
    541          y    : BITVECTOR(64);
    542          z    : BITVECTOR(64);
    543          mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
    544          QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
    545                 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
    546          );
    547          QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
    548                 ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
    549          );
    550       */
    551 
    552       // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
    553       // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
    554       // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
    555       // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
    556       // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
    557       // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
    558       // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
    559 
    560       // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
    561       // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
    562       //
    563       // mask = (1 << z)
    564       // (x & ~mask) == y  --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
    565       //
    566       // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
    567       // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
    568 
    569       // Pattern match a special case:
    570       /*
    571         QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
    572                ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
    573         );
    574       */
    575       if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
    576                 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
    577         APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
    578         if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
    579           // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
    580           if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
    581             return false;
    582 
    583           Vals.push_back(C);
    584           Vals.push_back(
    585               ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
    586                                C->getValue() | Mask));
    587           UsedICmps++;
    588           return true;
    589         }
    590       }
    591 
    592       // Pattern match a special case:
    593       /*
    594         QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
    595                ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
    596         );
    597       */
    598       if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
    599                 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
    600         APInt Mask = *RHSC;
    601         if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
    602           // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
    603           if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
    604             return false;
    605 
    606           Vals.push_back(C);
    607           Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
    608                                           C->getValue() & ~Mask));
    609           UsedICmps++;
    610           return true;
    611         }
    612       }
    613 
    614       // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
    615       if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
    616         return false;
    617 
    618       UsedICmps++;
    619       Vals.push_back(C);
    620       return ICI->getOperand(0);
    621     }
    622 
    623     // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
    624     ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
    625         ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
    626 
    627     // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
    628     // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
    629     Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
    630     if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
    631       Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
    632       CandidateVal = RHSVal;
    633     }
    634 
    635     // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
    636     // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
    637     // x != 0 && x != 1.
    638     if (!isEQ)
    639       Span = Span.inverse();
    640 
    641     // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
    642     if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
    643       return false;
    644     }
    645 
    646     // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
    647     if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
    648       return false;
    649 
    650     // Add all values from the range to the set
    651     for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
    652       Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
    653 
    654     UsedICmps++;
    655     return true;
    656   }
    657 
    658   /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
    659   /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
    660   /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
    661   /// vector.
    662   /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
    663   void gather(Value *V) {
    664     bool isEQ = match(V, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
    665 
    666     // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
    667     SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
    668     SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
    669 
    670     // Initialize
    671     Visited.insert(V);
    672     DFT.push_back(V);
    673 
    674     while (!DFT.empty()) {
    675       V = DFT.pop_back_val();
    676 
    677       if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
    678         // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
    679         Value *Op0, *Op1;
    680         if (isEQ ? match(I, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))
    681                  : match(I, m_LogicalAnd(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))) {
    682           if (Visited.insert(Op1).second)
    683             DFT.push_back(Op1);
    684           if (Visited.insert(Op0).second)
    685             DFT.push_back(Op0);
    686 
    687           continue;
    688         }
    689 
    690         // Try to match the current instruction
    691         if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
    692           // Match succeed, continue the loop
    693           continue;
    694       }
    695 
    696       // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
    697       // comparison against the same value as the others.
    698       // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
    699       if (!Extra) {
    700         Extra = V;
    701         continue;
    702       }
    703       // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
    704       CompValue = nullptr;
    705       break;
    706     }
    707   }
    708 };
    709 
    710 } // end anonymous namespace
    711 
    712 static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI,
    713                                       MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
    714   Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
    715   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
    716     Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
    717   } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
    718     if (BI->isConditional())
    719       Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
    720   } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
    721     Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
    722   }
    723 
    724   TI->eraseFromParent();
    725   if (Cond)
    726     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond, nullptr, MSSAU);
    727 }
    728 
    729 /// Return true if the specified terminator checks
    730 /// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
    731 Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
    732   Value *CV = nullptr;
    733   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
    734     // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
    735     // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
    736     if (!SI->getParent()->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(128 / SI->getNumSuccessors()))
    737       CV = SI->getCondition();
    738   } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
    739     if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
    740       if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
    741         if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
    742           CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
    743       }
    744 
    745   // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
    746   if (CV) {
    747     if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
    748       Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
    749       if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
    750         CV = Ptr;
    751     }
    752   }
    753   return CV;
    754 }
    755 
    756 /// Given a value comparison instruction,
    757 /// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
    758 BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
    759     Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
    760   if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
    761     Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
    762     for (auto Case : SI->cases())
    763       Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
    764                                                   Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
    765     return SI->getDefaultDest();
    766   }
    767 
    768   BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
    769   ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
    770   BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
    771   Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
    772       GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
    773   return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
    774 }
    775 
    776 /// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
    777 /// in the list that match the specified block.
    778 static void
    779 EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
    780                     std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
    781   llvm::erase_value(Cases, BB);
    782 }
    783 
    784 /// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
    785 static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
    786                           std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
    787   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
    788 
    789   // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
    790   if (V1->size() > V2->size())
    791     std::swap(V1, V2);
    792 
    793   if (V1->empty())
    794     return false;
    795   if (V1->size() == 1) {
    796     // Just scan V2.
    797     ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
    798     for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
    799       if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
    800         return true;
    801   }
    802 
    803   // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
    804   array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
    805   array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
    806   unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
    807   while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
    808     if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
    809       return true;
    810     if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
    811       ++i1;
    812     else
    813       ++i2;
    814   }
    815   return false;
    816 }
    817 
    818 // Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
    819 // least one non-zero weight.
    820 static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
    821   // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
    822   // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
    823   MDNode *N = nullptr;
    824   if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
    825     N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
    826   SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
    827 }
    828 
    829 // Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
    830 // exactly 2 weights.
    831 static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
    832                              uint32_t FalseWeight) {
    833   assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
    834   // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
    835   // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
    836   MDNode *N = nullptr;
    837   if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
    838     N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
    839             .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
    840   I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
    841 }
    842 
    843 /// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
    844 /// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
    845 /// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
    846 /// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
    847 /// very limited form of jump threading.
    848 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
    849     Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
    850   Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
    851   if (!PredVal)
    852     return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
    853 
    854   Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
    855   assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
    856   if (ThisVal != PredVal)
    857     return false; // Different predicates.
    858 
    859   // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
    860   // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
    861 
    862   // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
    863   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
    864   BasicBlock *PredDef =
    865       GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
    866   EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
    867 
    868   // Find information about how control leaves this block.
    869   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
    870   BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
    871   EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
    872 
    873   // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
    874   // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
    875   if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
    876     // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
    877     // PredCases.  If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
    878     // can simplify TI.
    879     if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
    880       return false;
    881 
    882     if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
    883       // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead.  Convert it to a
    884       // uncond br.
    885       assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
    886       // Insert the new branch.
    887       Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
    888       (void)NI;
    889 
    890       // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
    891       ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(PredDef);
    892 
    893       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
    894                         << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
    895                         << "\n");
    896 
    897       EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
    898 
    899       if (DTU)
    900         DTU->applyUpdates(
    901             {{DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, ThisCases[0].Dest}});
    902 
    903       return true;
    904     }
    905 
    906     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SI = *cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
    907     // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
    908     SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
    909     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
    910       DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
    911 
    912     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
    913                       << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
    914 
    915     SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
    916     for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
    917       --i;
    918       auto *Successor = i->getCaseSuccessor();
    919       if (DTU)
    920         ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
    921       if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
    922         Successor->removePredecessor(PredDef);
    923         SI.removeCase(i);
    924         if (DTU)
    925           --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
    926       }
    927     }
    928 
    929     if (DTU) {
    930       std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
    931       for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int> &I : NumPerSuccessorCases)
    932         if (I.second == 0)
    933           Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, I.first});
    934       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
    935     }
    936 
    937     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
    938     return true;
    939   }
    940 
    941   // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value.  Find out
    942   // which value (or set of values) this is.
    943   ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
    944   BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
    945   for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
    946     if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
    947       if (TIV)
    948         return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
    949       TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
    950     }
    951   assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
    952 
    953   // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
    954   // BB.  Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
    955   BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
    956   for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
    957     if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
    958       TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
    959       break;
    960     }
    961 
    962   // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
    963   if (!TheRealDest)
    964     TheRealDest = ThisDef;
    965 
    966   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccs;
    967 
    968   // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
    969   BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
    970   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
    971     if (Succ != CheckEdge) {
    972       if (Succ != TheRealDest)
    973         RemovedSuccs.insert(Succ);
    974       Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
    975     } else
    976       CheckEdge = nullptr;
    977 
    978   // Insert the new branch.
    979   Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
    980   (void)NI;
    981 
    982   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
    983                     << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
    984                     << "\n");
    985 
    986   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
    987   if (DTU) {
    988     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
    989     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
    990     for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
    991       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, TIBB, RemovedSucc});
    992     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
    993   }
    994   return true;
    995 }
    996 
    997 namespace {
    998 
    999 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
   1000 /// integers that does not depend on their address.  This is important for
   1001 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
   1002 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
   1003   bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
   1004     return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
   1005   }
   1006 };
   1007 
   1008 } // end anonymous namespace
   1009 
   1010 static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
   1011                                     ConstantInt *const *P2) {
   1012   const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
   1013   const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
   1014   if (LHS == RHS)
   1015     return 0;
   1016   return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
   1017 }
   1018 
   1019 static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
   1020   MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
   1021   if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
   1022     if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
   1023       return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
   1024 
   1025   return false;
   1026 }
   1027 
   1028 /// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
   1029 /// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
   1030 /// metadata.
   1031 static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
   1032                              SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
   1033   MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
   1034   assert(MD);
   1035   for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
   1036     ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
   1037     Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
   1038   }
   1039 
   1040   // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
   1041   // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
   1042   // default weight to be the first entry.
   1043   if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
   1044     assert(Weights.size() == 2);
   1045     ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
   1046     if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
   1047       std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
   1048   }
   1049 }
   1050 
   1051 /// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
   1052 static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
   1053   uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
   1054   if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
   1055     unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
   1056     for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
   1057       I >>= Offset;
   1058   }
   1059 }
   1060 
   1061 static void CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(
   1062     BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *PredBlock, ValueToValueMapTy &VMap) {
   1063   Instruction *PTI = PredBlock->getTerminator();
   1064 
   1065   // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
   1066   // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
   1067   // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
   1068   for (Instruction &BonusInst : *BB) {
   1069     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst) || BonusInst.isTerminator())
   1070       continue;
   1071 
   1072     Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst.clone();
   1073 
   1074     if (PTI->getDebugLoc() != NewBonusInst->getDebugLoc()) {
   1075       // Unless the instruction has the same !dbg location as the original
   1076       // branch, drop it. When we fold the bonus instructions we want to make
   1077       // sure we reset their debug locations in order to avoid stepping on
   1078       // dead code caused by folding dead branches.
   1079       NewBonusInst->setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
   1080     }
   1081 
   1082     RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
   1083                      RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
   1084     VMap[&BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
   1085 
   1086     // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
   1087     // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
   1088     // only given the branch precondition.
   1089     // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
   1090     // semantics we don't understand. We *can* preserve !annotation, because
   1091     // it is tied to the instruction itself, not the value or position.
   1092     NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_annotation);
   1093 
   1094     PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PTI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
   1095     NewBonusInst->takeName(&BonusInst);
   1096     BonusInst.setName(NewBonusInst->getName() + ".old");
   1097 
   1098     // Update (liveout) uses of bonus instructions,
   1099     // now that the bonus instruction has been cloned into predecessor.
   1100     SSAUpdater SSAUpdate;
   1101     SSAUpdate.Initialize(BonusInst.getType(),
   1102                          (NewBonusInst->getName() + ".merge").str());
   1103     SSAUpdate.AddAvailableValue(BB, &BonusInst);
   1104     SSAUpdate.AddAvailableValue(PredBlock, NewBonusInst);
   1105     for (Use &U : make_early_inc_range(BonusInst.uses())) {
   1106       auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
   1107       if (UI->getParent() != PredBlock)
   1108         SSAUpdate.RewriteUseAfterInsertions(U);
   1109       else // Use is in the same block as, and comes before, NewBonusInst.
   1110         SSAUpdate.RewriteUse(U);
   1111     }
   1112   }
   1113 }
   1114 
   1115 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(
   1116     Instruction *TI, Value *&CV, Instruction *PTI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   1117   BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
   1118   BasicBlock *Pred = PTI->getParent();
   1119 
   1120   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 32> Updates;
   1121 
   1122   // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
   1123   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
   1124   BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
   1125 
   1126   std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
   1127   BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
   1128 
   1129   // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
   1130   // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
   1131   // build.
   1132   SmallMapVector<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NewSuccessors;
   1133 
   1134   // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
   1135   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
   1136   bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
   1137   bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
   1138 
   1139   if (PredHasWeights) {
   1140     GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
   1141     // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
   1142     if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
   1143       PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
   1144   } else if (SuccHasWeights)
   1145     // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
   1146     // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
   1147     // successor's weights
   1148     Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
   1149 
   1150   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
   1151   if (SuccHasWeights) {
   1152     GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
   1153     // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
   1154     if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
   1155       PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
   1156   } else if (PredHasWeights)
   1157     SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
   1158 
   1159   if (PredDefault == BB) {
   1160     // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
   1161     // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
   1162     std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
   1163     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
   1164       if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
   1165         PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
   1166       else {
   1167         // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
   1168         std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
   1169 
   1170         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
   1171           // Increase weight for the default case.
   1172           Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
   1173           std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
   1174           Weights.pop_back();
   1175         }
   1176 
   1177         PredCases.pop_back();
   1178         --i;
   1179         --e;
   1180       }
   1181 
   1182     // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
   1183     if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
   1184       PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
   1185       if (DTU && PredDefault != BB)
   1186         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, PredDefault});
   1187       PredDefault = BBDefault;
   1188       ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
   1189     }
   1190 
   1191     unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
   1192     uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
   1193     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
   1194       if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) && BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
   1195         PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
   1196         ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
   1197         if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
   1198           // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
   1199           // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
   1200           // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
   1201           Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
   1202           ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
   1203         }
   1204       }
   1205 
   1206     if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
   1207       ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
   1208       // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
   1209       for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
   1210         Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
   1211       // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
   1212       Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
   1213     }
   1214   } else {
   1215     // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
   1216     // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
   1217     // activated.
   1218     std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
   1219     std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
   1220     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
   1221       if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
   1222         PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
   1223 
   1224         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
   1225           WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
   1226           std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
   1227           Weights.pop_back();
   1228         }
   1229 
   1230         std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
   1231         PredCases.pop_back();
   1232         --i;
   1233         --e;
   1234       }
   1235 
   1236     // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
   1237     // predecessor.  Figure out where they will all go now.
   1238     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
   1239       if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
   1240         // If this is one we are capable of getting...
   1241         if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
   1242           Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
   1243         PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
   1244         ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
   1245         PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
   1246       }
   1247 
   1248     // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
   1249     // they must go to the default destination of TI.
   1250     for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
   1251       if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
   1252         Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
   1253       PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
   1254       ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
   1255     }
   1256   }
   1257 
   1258   // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get.  Make
   1259   // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
   1260   // successors.
   1261   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> SuccsOfPred;
   1262   if (DTU) {
   1263     SuccsOfPred = {succ_begin(Pred), succ_end(Pred)};
   1264     Updates.reserve(Updates.size() + NewSuccessors.size());
   1265   }
   1266   for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int /*Num*/> &NewSuccessor :
   1267        NewSuccessors) {
   1268     for (auto I : seq(0, NewSuccessor.second)) {
   1269       (void)I;
   1270       AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor.first, Pred, BB);
   1271     }
   1272     if (DTU && !SuccsOfPred.contains(NewSuccessor.first))
   1273       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewSuccessor.first});
   1274   }
   1275 
   1276   Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
   1277   // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
   1278   if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
   1279     CV =
   1280         Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()), "magicptr");
   1281   }
   1282 
   1283   // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
   1284   SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
   1285   NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
   1286   for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
   1287     NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
   1288 
   1289   if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
   1290     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
   1291     FitWeights(Weights);
   1292 
   1293     SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
   1294 
   1295     setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
   1296   }
   1297 
   1298   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
   1299 
   1300   // Okay, last check.  If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
   1301   // have an infinite loop case.  If so, add an infinitely looping block
   1302   // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
   1303   BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
   1304   for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
   1305     if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
   1306       if (!InfLoopBlock) {
   1307         // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
   1308         // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
   1309         InfLoopBlock =
   1310             BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
   1311         BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
   1312         if (DTU)
   1313           Updates.push_back(
   1314               {DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
   1315       }
   1316       NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
   1317     }
   1318 
   1319   if (DTU) {
   1320     if (InfLoopBlock)
   1321       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, InfLoopBlock});
   1322 
   1323     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
   1324 
   1325     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   1326   }
   1327 
   1328   // Here the BB is not a dead block but folded into its predecessors, so move
   1329   // the probe and mark it as dangling.
   1330   moveAndDanglePseudoProbes(BB, NewSI);
   1331 
   1332   ++NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors;
   1333   return true;
   1334 }
   1335 
   1336 /// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
   1337 /// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
   1338 /// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
   1339 /// on the same value.  If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
   1340 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
   1341                                                          IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   1342   BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
   1343   Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
   1344   assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
   1345 
   1346   bool Changed = false;
   1347 
   1348   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
   1349   while (!Preds.empty()) {
   1350     BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
   1351     Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
   1352 
   1353     // Don't try to fold into itself.
   1354     if (Pred == BB)
   1355       continue;
   1356 
   1357     // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
   1358     Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
   1359     if (PCV != CV)
   1360       continue;
   1361 
   1362     SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> FailBlocks;
   1363     if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
   1364       for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
   1365         if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split", DTU))
   1366           return false;
   1367       }
   1368     }
   1369 
   1370     PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(TI, CV, PTI, Builder);
   1371     Changed = true;
   1372   }
   1373   return Changed;
   1374 }
   1375 
   1376 // If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
   1377 // (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
   1378 // can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
   1379 static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
   1380                                 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
   1381   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
   1382     for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
   1383       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
   1384       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
   1385       if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
   1386         return false;
   1387       }
   1388     }
   1389   }
   1390   return true;
   1391 }
   1392 
   1393 static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified = false);
   1394 
   1395 /// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
   1396 /// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
   1397 /// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2. If EqTermsOnly is given,
   1398 /// only perform hoisting in case both blocks only contain a terminator. In that
   1399 /// case, only the original BI will be replaced and selects for PHIs are added.
   1400 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
   1401                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
   1402                                            bool EqTermsOnly) {
   1403   // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
   1404   // instructions in the two blocks.  In particular, we don't want to get into
   1405   // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2.  As
   1406   // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
   1407   // identical order.
   1408   BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
   1409   BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
   1410 
   1411   BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
   1412   BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
   1413 
   1414   Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
   1415   // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
   1416   DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
   1417   DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
   1418   if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
   1419     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
   1420       I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
   1421     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
   1422       I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
   1423   }
   1424   // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
   1425   if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
   1426       (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)) ||
   1427       isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
   1428     return false;
   1429 
   1430   BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
   1431 
   1432   bool Changed = false;
   1433 
   1434   auto _ = make_scope_exit([&]() {
   1435     if (Changed)
   1436       ++NumHoistCommonCode;
   1437   });
   1438 
   1439   // Check if only hoisting terminators is allowed. This does not add new
   1440   // instructions to the hoist location.
   1441   if (EqTermsOnly) {
   1442     // Skip any debug intrinsics, as they are free to hoist.
   1443     auto *I1NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I1->getIterator());
   1444     auto *I2NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I2->getIterator());
   1445     if (!I1NonDbg->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2NonDbg))
   1446       return false;
   1447     if (!I1NonDbg->isTerminator())
   1448       return false;
   1449     // Now we know that we only need to hoist debug instrinsics and the
   1450     // terminator. Let the loop below handle those 2 cases.
   1451   }
   1452 
   1453   do {
   1454     // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
   1455     // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
   1456     if (I1->isTerminator())
   1457       goto HoistTerminator;
   1458 
   1459     // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
   1460     // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
   1461     // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
   1462     // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
   1463     // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
   1464     auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
   1465     auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
   1466     if (C1 && C2)
   1467       if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
   1468         return Changed;
   1469 
   1470     if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
   1471       return Changed;
   1472 
   1473     // If any of the two call sites has nomerge attribute, stop hoisting.
   1474     if (const auto *CB1 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I1))
   1475       if (CB1->cannotMerge())
   1476         return Changed;
   1477     if (const auto *CB2 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I2))
   1478       if (CB2->cannotMerge())
   1479         return Changed;
   1480 
   1481     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
   1482       assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
   1483       // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
   1484       // and can't be separated from it or replaced.  Instead of attempting
   1485       // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
   1486       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
   1487                                      BB1->getInstList(), I1);
   1488       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
   1489                                      BB2->getInstList(), I2);
   1490       Changed = true;
   1491     } else {
   1492       // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
   1493       // then replace all uses of the other with the first.  Finally, we remove
   1494       // the now redundant second instruction.
   1495       BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
   1496                                      BB1->getInstList(), I1);
   1497       if (!I2->use_empty())
   1498         I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
   1499       I1->andIRFlags(I2);
   1500       unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
   1501                              LLVMContext::MD_range,
   1502                              LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
   1503                              LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
   1504                              LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
   1505                              LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
   1506                              LLVMContext::MD_align,
   1507                              LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
   1508                              LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
   1509                              LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access,
   1510                              LLVMContext::MD_access_group,
   1511                              LLVMContext::MD_preserve_access_index};
   1512       combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
   1513 
   1514       // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction.  Its debug
   1515       // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
   1516       I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
   1517 
   1518       I2->eraseFromParent();
   1519       Changed = true;
   1520     }
   1521     ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
   1522 
   1523     I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
   1524     I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
   1525     // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
   1526     DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
   1527     DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
   1528     if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
   1529       while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
   1530         I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
   1531       while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
   1532         I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
   1533     }
   1534   } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
   1535 
   1536   return true;
   1537 
   1538 HoistTerminator:
   1539   // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
   1540   // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
   1541   if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
   1542     return Changed;
   1543 
   1544   // TODO: callbr hoisting currently disabled pending further study.
   1545   if (isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
   1546     return Changed;
   1547 
   1548   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
   1549     for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
   1550       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
   1551       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
   1552       if (BB1V == BB2V)
   1553         continue;
   1554 
   1555       // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
   1556       // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
   1557       if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
   1558           passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
   1559         return Changed;
   1560 
   1561       if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
   1562         return Changed;
   1563       if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
   1564         return Changed;
   1565     }
   1566   }
   1567 
   1568   // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
   1569   Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
   1570   BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
   1571   if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
   1572     I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
   1573     I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
   1574     NT->takeName(I1);
   1575   }
   1576   Changed = true;
   1577   ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
   1578 
   1579   // Ensure terminator gets a debug location, even an unknown one, in case
   1580   // it involves inlinable calls.
   1581   NT->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
   1582 
   1583   // PHIs created below will adopt NT's merged DebugLoc.
   1584   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
   1585 
   1586   // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
   1587   // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
   1588   // them.  If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
   1589   // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
   1590   std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
   1591   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
   1592     for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
   1593       Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
   1594       Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
   1595       if (BB1V == BB2V)
   1596         continue;
   1597 
   1598       // These values do not agree.  Insert a select instruction before NT
   1599       // that determines the right value.
   1600       SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
   1601       if (!SI) {
   1602         // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi node to its replacement select.
   1603         IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
   1604         if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
   1605           Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN.getFastMathFlags());
   1606 
   1607         SI = cast<SelectInst>(
   1608             Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
   1609                                  BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
   1610       }
   1611 
   1612       // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
   1613       for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
   1614         if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
   1615           PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
   1616     }
   1617   }
   1618 
   1619   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 4> Updates;
   1620 
   1621   // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
   1622   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
   1623     AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
   1624     if (DTU)
   1625       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BIParent, Succ});
   1626   }
   1627 
   1628   if (DTU)
   1629     for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BI))
   1630       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BIParent, Succ});
   1631 
   1632   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
   1633   if (DTU)
   1634     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   1635   return Changed;
   1636 }
   1637 
   1638 // Check lifetime markers.
   1639 static bool isLifeTimeMarker(const Instruction *I) {
   1640   if (auto II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I)) {
   1641     switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
   1642     default:
   1643       break;
   1644     case Intrinsic::lifetime_start:
   1645     case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
   1646       return true;
   1647     }
   1648   }
   1649   return false;
   1650 }
   1651 
   1652 // TODO: Refine this. This should avoid cases like turning constant memcpy sizes
   1653 // into variables.
   1654 static bool replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(const Instruction *I,
   1655                                                 int OpIdx) {
   1656   return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
   1657 }
   1658 
   1659 // All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
   1660 // branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
   1661 // would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
   1662 // instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
   1663 // PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
   1664 static bool canSinkInstructions(
   1665     ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
   1666     DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
   1667   // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Each instruction must have
   1668   // exactly zero or one use, and we check later that use is by a single, common
   1669   // PHI instruction in the successor.
   1670   bool HasUse = !Insts.front()->user_empty();
   1671   for (auto *I : Insts) {
   1672     // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
   1673     if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
   1674         I->getType()->isTokenTy())
   1675       return false;
   1676 
   1677     // Do not try to sink an instruction in an infinite loop - it can cause
   1678     // this algorithm to infinite loop.
   1679     if (I->getParent()->getSingleSuccessor() == I->getParent())
   1680       return false;
   1681 
   1682     // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
   1683     // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
   1684     // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
   1685     // If the instruction has nomerge attribute, return false.
   1686     if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I))
   1687       if (C->isInlineAsm() || C->cannotMerge())
   1688         return false;
   1689 
   1690     // Each instruction must have zero or one use.
   1691     if (HasUse && !I->hasOneUse())
   1692       return false;
   1693     if (!HasUse && !I->user_empty())
   1694       return false;
   1695   }
   1696 
   1697   const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
   1698   for (auto *I : Insts)
   1699     if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
   1700       return false;
   1701 
   1702   // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they have a
   1703   // use, check that the only user is a PHI or in the same block as the
   1704   // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction we're
   1705   // contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
   1706   if (HasUse) {
   1707     auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
   1708     auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
   1709     if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
   1710           auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
   1711           return (PNUse &&
   1712                   PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
   1713                   PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
   1714                  U->getParent() == I->getParent();
   1715         }))
   1716       return false;
   1717   }
   1718 
   1719   // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not to sink
   1720   // loads, stores or lifetime markers of allocas when we'd have to create a
   1721   // PHI for the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or
   1722   // stores of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink
   1723   // them.
   1724   // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
   1725   // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
   1726   // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
   1727   // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
   1728   if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
   1729         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
   1730       }))
   1731     return false;
   1732   if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
   1733         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0)->stripPointerCasts());
   1734       }))
   1735     return false;
   1736   if (isLifeTimeMarker(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
   1737         return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
   1738       }))
   1739     return false;
   1740 
   1741   // For calls to be sinkable, they must all be indirect, or have same callee.
   1742   // I.e. if we have two direct calls to different callees, we don't want to
   1743   // turn that into an indirect call. Likewise, if we have an indirect call,
   1744   // and a direct call, we don't actually want to have a single indirect call.
   1745   if (isa<CallBase>(I0)) {
   1746     auto IsIndirectCall = [](const Instruction *I) {
   1747       return cast<CallBase>(I)->isIndirectCall();
   1748     };
   1749     bool HaveIndirectCalls = any_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
   1750     bool AllCallsAreIndirect = all_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
   1751     if (HaveIndirectCalls) {
   1752       if (!AllCallsAreIndirect)
   1753         return false;
   1754     } else {
   1755       // All callees must be identical.
   1756       Value *Callee = nullptr;
   1757       for (const Instruction *I : Insts) {
   1758         Value *CurrCallee = cast<CallBase>(I)->getCalledOperand();
   1759         if (!Callee)
   1760           Callee = CurrCallee;
   1761         else if (Callee != CurrCallee)
   1762           return false;
   1763       }
   1764     }
   1765   }
   1766 
   1767   for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
   1768     Value *Op = I0->getOperand(OI);
   1769     if (Op->getType()->isTokenTy())
   1770       // Don't touch any operand of token type.
   1771       return false;
   1772 
   1773     auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
   1774       assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
   1775       return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
   1776     };
   1777     if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
   1778       if ((isa<Constant>(Op) && !replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(I0, OI)) ||
   1779           !canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
   1780         // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
   1781         return false;
   1782       for (auto *I : Insts)
   1783         PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
   1784     }
   1785   }
   1786   return true;
   1787 }
   1788 
   1789 // Assuming canSinkInstructions(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
   1790 // instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
   1791 // into one instruction.
   1792 static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
   1793   auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
   1794 
   1795   // canSinkInstructions returning true guarantees that every block has at
   1796   // least one non-terminator instruction.
   1797   SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
   1798   for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
   1799     Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
   1800     do {
   1801       I = I->getPrevNode();
   1802     } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
   1803     if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
   1804       Insts.push_back(I);
   1805   }
   1806 
   1807   // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
   1808   // are the same PHI node. canSinkInstructions should have checked this but
   1809   // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative
   1810   // instructions so double-check it here.
   1811   Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
   1812   if (!I0->user_empty()) {
   1813     auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
   1814     if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
   1815           auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
   1816           return U == PNUse;
   1817         }))
   1818       return false;
   1819   }
   1820 
   1821   // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkInstructions should
   1822   // have done it all for us.
   1823   SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
   1824   for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
   1825     // This check is different to that in canSinkInstructions. There, we
   1826     // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
   1827     // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
   1828     // simplifiable.  However here we need a more local view; if an operand
   1829     // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
   1830     // small mess we may make.
   1831     bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
   1832       return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
   1833     });
   1834     if (!NeedPHI) {
   1835       NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
   1836       continue;
   1837     }
   1838 
   1839     // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
   1840     auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
   1841     assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
   1842     auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
   1843                                Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
   1844     for (auto *I : Insts)
   1845       PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
   1846     NewOperands.push_back(PN);
   1847   }
   1848 
   1849   // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
   1850   // and move it to the start of the successor block.
   1851   for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
   1852     I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
   1853   I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
   1854 
   1855   // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
   1856   for (auto *I : Insts)
   1857     if (I != I0) {
   1858       // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
   1859       // of all the commoned instructions.  We start with the original location
   1860       // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
   1861       // loop below.
   1862       // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
   1863       // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
   1864       // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
   1865       I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
   1866       combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
   1867       I0->andIRFlags(I);
   1868     }
   1869 
   1870   if (!I0->user_empty()) {
   1871     // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
   1872     // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
   1873     // instruction and nuke it.
   1874     auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
   1875     PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
   1876     PN->eraseFromParent();
   1877   }
   1878 
   1879   // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
   1880   for (auto *I : Insts)
   1881     if (I != I0)
   1882       I->eraseFromParent();
   1883 
   1884   return true;
   1885 }
   1886 
   1887 namespace {
   1888 
   1889   // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
   1890   // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
   1891   // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
   1892   //   LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
   1893   //   *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
   1894   //   *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
   1895   //   *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
   1896   //   ...
   1897   class LockstepReverseIterator {
   1898     ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
   1899     SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
   1900     bool Fail;
   1901 
   1902   public:
   1903     LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
   1904       reset();
   1905     }
   1906 
   1907     void reset() {
   1908       Fail = false;
   1909       Insts.clear();
   1910       for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
   1911         Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
   1912         for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
   1913           Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
   1914         if (!Inst) {
   1915           // Block wasn't big enough.
   1916           Fail = true;
   1917           return;
   1918         }
   1919         Insts.push_back(Inst);
   1920       }
   1921     }
   1922 
   1923     bool isValid() const {
   1924       return !Fail;
   1925     }
   1926 
   1927     void operator--() {
   1928       if (Fail)
   1929         return;
   1930       for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
   1931         for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
   1932           Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
   1933         // Already at beginning of block.
   1934         if (!Inst) {
   1935           Fail = true;
   1936           return;
   1937         }
   1938       }
   1939     }
   1940 
   1941     void operator++() {
   1942       if (Fail)
   1943         return;
   1944       for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
   1945         for (Inst = Inst->getNextNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
   1946           Inst = Inst->getNextNode();
   1947         // Already at end of block.
   1948         if (!Inst) {
   1949           Fail = true;
   1950           return;
   1951         }
   1952       }
   1953     }
   1954 
   1955     ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
   1956       return Insts;
   1957     }
   1958   };
   1959 
   1960 } // end anonymous namespace
   1961 
   1962 /// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
   1963 /// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
   1964 static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB,
   1965                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   1966   // We support two situations:
   1967   //   (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
   1968   //   (2) there are non-unconditional incoming arcs
   1969   //
   1970   // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
   1971   // else-if patterns;
   1972   //
   1973   //   if (a) f(1);
   1974   //   else if (b) f(2);
   1975   //
   1976   // produces:
   1977   //
   1978   //       [if]
   1979   //      /    \
   1980   //    [f(1)] [if]
   1981   //      |     | \
   1982   //      |     |  |
   1983   //      |  [f(2)]|
   1984   //       \    | /
   1985   //        [ end ]
   1986   //
   1987   // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
   1988   // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
   1989   // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
   1990   //
   1991   // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
   1992   // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
   1993   // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
   1994   // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
   1995   //
   1996   //       [if]
   1997   //      /    \
   1998   //    [x(1)] [if]
   1999   //      |     | \
   2000   //      |     |  \
   2001   //      |  [x(2)] |
   2002   //       \   /    |
   2003   //   [sink.split] |
   2004   //         \     /
   2005   //         [ end ]
   2006   //
   2007   SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
   2008   bool HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = false;
   2009   for (auto *PredBB : predecessors(BB)) {
   2010     auto *PredBr = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBB->getTerminator());
   2011     if (PredBr && PredBr->isUnconditional())
   2012       UnconditionalPreds.push_back(PredBB);
   2013     else
   2014       HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = true;
   2015   }
   2016   if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
   2017     return false;
   2018 
   2019   // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
   2020   // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
   2021   // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
   2022   // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
   2023   // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
   2024   // PHIOperands.
   2025   int ScanIdx = 0;
   2026   SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
   2027   DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
   2028   LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
   2029   while (LRI.isValid() &&
   2030          canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
   2031     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
   2032                       << "\n");
   2033     InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
   2034     ++ScanIdx;
   2035     --LRI;
   2036   }
   2037 
   2038   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
   2039   if (ScanIdx == 0)
   2040     return false;
   2041 
   2042   // Okay, we *could* sink last ScanIdx instructions. But how many can we
   2043   // actually sink before encountering instruction that is unprofitable to sink?
   2044   auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
   2045     unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
   2046     for (auto *I : *LRI)
   2047       for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I]) {
   2048         if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
   2049           ++NumPHIdValues;
   2050         // FIXME: this check is overly optimistic. We may end up not sinking
   2051         // said instruction, due to the very same profitability check.
   2052         // See @creating_too_many_phis in sink-common-code.ll.
   2053       }
   2054     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
   2055     unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
   2056     if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
   2057         NumPHIInsts++;
   2058 
   2059     return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
   2060   };
   2061 
   2062   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
   2063   if (ScanIdx == 0)
   2064     return false;
   2065 
   2066   // We've determined that we are going to sink last ScanIdx instructions,
   2067   // and recorded them in InstructionsToSink. Now, some instructions may be
   2068   // unprofitable to sink. But that determination depends on the instructions
   2069   // that we are going to sink.
   2070 
   2071   // First, forward scan: find the first instruction unprofitable to sink,
   2072   // recording all the ones that are profitable to sink.
   2073   // FIXME: would it be better, after we detect that not all are profitable.
   2074   // to either record the profitable ones, or erase the unprofitable ones?
   2075   // Maybe we need to choose (at runtime) the one that will touch least instrs?
   2076   LRI.reset();
   2077   int Idx = 0;
   2078   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> InstructionsProfitableToSink;
   2079   while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
   2080     if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
   2081       // Too many PHIs would be created.
   2082       LLVM_DEBUG(
   2083           dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
   2084       break;
   2085     }
   2086     InstructionsProfitableToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
   2087     --LRI;
   2088     ++Idx;
   2089   }
   2090 
   2091   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
   2092   if (Idx == 0)
   2093     return false;
   2094 
   2095   // Did we determine that (only) some instructions are unprofitable to sink?
   2096   if (Idx < ScanIdx) {
   2097     // Okay, some instructions are unprofitable.
   2098     ScanIdx = Idx;
   2099     InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
   2100 
   2101     // But, that may make other instructions unprofitable, too.
   2102     // So, do a backward scan, do any earlier instructions become unprofitable?
   2103     assert(!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) &&
   2104            "We already know that the last instruction is unprofitable to sink");
   2105     ++LRI;
   2106     --Idx;
   2107     while (Idx >= 0) {
   2108       // If we detect that an instruction becomes unprofitable to sink,
   2109       // all earlier instructions won't be sunk either,
   2110       // so preemptively keep InstructionsProfitableToSink in sync.
   2111       // FIXME: is this the most performant approach?
   2112       for (auto *I : *LRI)
   2113         InstructionsProfitableToSink.erase(I);
   2114       if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
   2115         // Everything starting with this instruction won't be sunk.
   2116         ScanIdx = Idx;
   2117         InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
   2118       }
   2119       ++LRI;
   2120       --Idx;
   2121     }
   2122   }
   2123 
   2124   // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
   2125   if (ScanIdx == 0)
   2126     return false;
   2127 
   2128   bool Changed = false;
   2129 
   2130   if (HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors) {
   2131     // It is always legal to sink common instructions from unconditional
   2132     // predecessors. However, if not all predecessors are unconditional,
   2133     // this transformation might be pessimizing. So as a rule of thumb,
   2134     // don't do it unless we'd sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
   2135     // See https://bugs.llvm.org/show_bug.cgi?id=30244
   2136     LRI.reset();
   2137     int Idx = 0;
   2138     bool Profitable = false;
   2139     while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
   2140       if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
   2141         Profitable = true;
   2142         break;
   2143       }
   2144       --LRI;
   2145       ++Idx;
   2146     }
   2147     if (!Profitable)
   2148       return false;
   2149 
   2150     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
   2151     // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
   2152     // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
   2153     if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split", DTU))
   2154       // Edges couldn't be split.
   2155       return false;
   2156     Changed = true;
   2157   }
   2158 
   2159   // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
   2160   // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
   2161   // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
   2162   // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
   2163   // per sunk instruction).
   2164   //
   2165   // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
   2166   // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
   2167   // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
   2168   // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
   2169   // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
   2170   // This is unlikely in practice though.
   2171   int SinkIdx = 0;
   2172   for (; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
   2173     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
   2174                       << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
   2175                       << "\n");
   2176 
   2177     // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
   2178     // sink is always at index 0.
   2179     LRI.reset();
   2180 
   2181     if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds)) {
   2182       LLVM_DEBUG(
   2183           dbgs()
   2184           << "SINK: stopping here, failed to actually sink instruction!\n");
   2185       break;
   2186     }
   2187 
   2188     NumSinkCommonInstrs++;
   2189     Changed = true;
   2190   }
   2191   if (SinkIdx != 0)
   2192     ++NumSinkCommonCode;
   2193   return Changed;
   2194 }
   2195 
   2196 /// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
   2197 /// conditional block.
   2198 ///
   2199 /// We are looking for code like the following:
   2200 ///   BrBB:
   2201 ///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
   2202 ///     ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
   2203 ///     ... // function).
   2204 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
   2205 ///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
   2206 ///   ThenBB:
   2207 ///     store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
   2208 ///     br label EndBB
   2209 ///   EndBB:
   2210 ///     ...
   2211 ///   We are going to transform this into:
   2212 ///   BrBB:
   2213 ///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
   2214 ///     ... //
   2215 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
   2216 ///     %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
   2217 ///     store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
   2218 ///     ...
   2219 ///
   2220 /// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
   2221 ///         hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
   2222 static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
   2223                                      BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
   2224   StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
   2225   if (!StoreToHoist)
   2226     return nullptr;
   2227 
   2228   // Volatile or atomic.
   2229   if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
   2230     return nullptr;
   2231 
   2232   Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
   2233 
   2234   // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
   2235   unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
   2236   // Skip pseudo probe intrinsic calls which are not really killing any memory
   2237   // accesses.
   2238   for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true))) {
   2239     if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
   2240       break;
   2241     --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
   2242 
   2243     // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
   2244     if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
   2245       return nullptr;
   2246 
   2247     if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
   2248       // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
   2249       if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
   2250         // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
   2251         return SI->getValueOperand();
   2252       return nullptr; // Unknown store.
   2253     }
   2254   }
   2255 
   2256   return nullptr;
   2257 }
   2258 
   2259 /// Estimate the cost of the insertion(s) and check that the PHI nodes can be
   2260 /// converted to selects.
   2261 static bool validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
   2262                                            BasicBlock *EndBB,
   2263                                            unsigned &SpeculatedInstructions,
   2264                                            InstructionCost &Cost,
   2265                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   2266   TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
   2267     BB->getParent()->hasMinSize()
   2268     ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
   2269     : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
   2270 
   2271   bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
   2272   for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
   2273     Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
   2274     Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
   2275 
   2276     // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
   2277     // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
   2278     if (ThenV == OrigV)
   2279       continue;
   2280 
   2281     Cost += TTI.getCmpSelInstrCost(Instruction::Select, PN.getType(), nullptr,
   2282                                    CmpInst::BAD_ICMP_PREDICATE, CostKind);
   2283 
   2284     // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
   2285     if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
   2286         passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
   2287       return false;
   2288 
   2289     HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
   2290     ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
   2291     ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
   2292     if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
   2293       continue; // Known safe and cheap.
   2294 
   2295     if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
   2296         (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
   2297       return false;
   2298     InstructionCost OrigCost = OrigCE ? computeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
   2299     InstructionCost ThenCost = ThenCE ? computeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
   2300     InstructionCost MaxCost =
   2301         2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
   2302     if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
   2303       return false;
   2304 
   2305     // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
   2306     // getting expanded into Instructions.
   2307     // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
   2308     // constant expression.
   2309     ++SpeculatedInstructions;
   2310     if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
   2311       return false;
   2312   }
   2313 
   2314   return HaveRewritablePHIs;
   2315 }
   2316 
   2317 /// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
   2318 ///
   2319 /// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
   2320 /// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
   2321 /// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
   2322 /// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
   2323 /// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
   2324 ///
   2325 /// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
   2326 /// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
   2327 /// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
   2328 /// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
   2329 ///
   2330 ///
   2331 /// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
   2332 /// \code
   2333 ///   BB:
   2334 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
   2335 ///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
   2336 ///   ThenBB:
   2337 ///     %sub = sub %x, %y
   2338 ///     br label BB2
   2339 ///   EndBB:
   2340 ///     %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
   2341 ///     ...
   2342 /// \endcode
   2343 ///
   2344 /// Into this IR:
   2345 /// \code
   2346 ///   BB:
   2347 ///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
   2348 ///     %sub = sub %x, %y
   2349 ///     %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
   2350 ///     ...
   2351 /// \endcode
   2352 ///
   2353 /// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
   2354 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
   2355                                             const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   2356   // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
   2357   Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
   2358   if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
   2359     return false;
   2360 
   2361   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   2362   BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
   2363   InstructionCost Budget =
   2364       PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
   2365 
   2366   // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
   2367   // to swap the select operands later.
   2368   bool Invert = false;
   2369   if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
   2370     assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
   2371     Invert = true;
   2372   }
   2373   assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
   2374 
   2375   // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
   2376   // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
   2377   // - They are defined in BB, and
   2378   // - They have no side effects, and
   2379   // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
   2380   SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
   2381 
   2382   SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
   2383 
   2384   unsigned SpeculatedInstructions = 0;
   2385   Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
   2386   StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
   2387   for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
   2388                             BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
   2389        BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
   2390     Instruction *I = &*BBI;
   2391     // Skip debug info.
   2392     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
   2393       SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
   2394       continue;
   2395     }
   2396 
   2397     // Skip pseudo probes. The consequence is we lose track of the branch
   2398     // probability for ThenBB, which is fine since the optimization here takes
   2399     // place regardless of the branch probability.
   2400     if (isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
   2401       continue;
   2402     }
   2403 
   2404     // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
   2405     // terminator) for now.
   2406     ++SpeculatedInstructions;
   2407     if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
   2408       return false;
   2409 
   2410     // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
   2411     if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
   2412         !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
   2413                                   I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
   2414       return false;
   2415     if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
   2416         computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
   2417             PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
   2418       return false;
   2419 
   2420     // Store the store speculation candidate.
   2421     if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
   2422       SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
   2423 
   2424     // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
   2425     // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
   2426     // being sunk into the use block.
   2427     for (Use &Op : I->operands()) {
   2428       Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Op);
   2429       if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
   2430         continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
   2431 
   2432       ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
   2433     }
   2434   }
   2435 
   2436   // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
   2437   // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
   2438   // and so iteration order isn't significant.
   2439   for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
   2440            I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
   2441            E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
   2442        I != E; ++I)
   2443     if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
   2444       ++SpeculatedInstructions;
   2445       if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
   2446         return false;
   2447     }
   2448 
   2449   // Check that we can insert the selects and that it's not too expensive to do
   2450   // so.
   2451   bool Convert = SpeculatedStore != nullptr;
   2452   InstructionCost Cost = 0;
   2453   Convert |= validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BB, ThenBB, EndBB,
   2454                                             SpeculatedInstructions,
   2455                                             Cost, TTI);
   2456   if (!Convert || Cost > Budget)
   2457     return false;
   2458 
   2459   // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
   2460   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
   2461 
   2462   // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
   2463   if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
   2464     IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
   2465     Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
   2466     Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
   2467     if (Invert)
   2468       std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
   2469     Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
   2470         BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
   2471     SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
   2472     SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
   2473                                          SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
   2474   }
   2475 
   2476   // A hoisted conditional probe should be treated as dangling so that it will
   2477   // not be over-counted when the samples collected on the non-conditional path
   2478   // are counted towards the conditional path. We leave it for the counts
   2479   // inference algorithm to figure out a proper count for a danglng probe.
   2480   moveAndDanglePseudoProbes(ThenBB, BI);
   2481 
   2482   // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
   2483   // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction. Drop the debug loc
   2484   // to avoid making it appear as if the condition is a constant, which would
   2485   // be misleading while debugging.
   2486   for (auto &I : *ThenBB) {
   2487     assert(!isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I) &&
   2488            "Should not drop debug info from any pseudo probes.");
   2489     if (!SpeculatedStoreValue || &I != SpeculatedStore)
   2490       I.setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
   2491     I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
   2492   }
   2493 
   2494   // Hoist the instructions.
   2495   BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
   2496                            ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
   2497 
   2498   // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
   2499   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
   2500   for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
   2501     unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
   2502     unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
   2503     Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
   2504     Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
   2505 
   2506     // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
   2507     if (OrigV == ThenV)
   2508       continue;
   2509 
   2510     // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
   2511     // false value is the pre-existing value. Swap them if the branch
   2512     // destinations were inverted.
   2513     Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
   2514     if (Invert)
   2515       std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
   2516     Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
   2517     PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
   2518     PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
   2519   }
   2520 
   2521   // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
   2522   // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
   2523   // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
   2524   for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
   2525     I->eraseFromParent();
   2526 
   2527   ++NumSpeculations;
   2528   return true;
   2529 }
   2530 
   2531 /// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
   2532 static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
   2533   int Size = 0;
   2534 
   2535   SmallPtrSet<const Value *, 32> EphValues;
   2536   auto IsEphemeral = [&](const Value *V) {
   2537     if (isa<AssumeInst>(V))
   2538       return true;
   2539     return isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(V) &&
   2540            all_of(V->users(),
   2541                   [&](const User *U) { return EphValues.count(U); });
   2542   };
   2543 
   2544   // Walk the loop in reverse so that we can identify ephemeral values properly
   2545   // (values only feeding assumes).
   2546   for (Instruction &I : reverse(BB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
   2547     // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
   2548     if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I))
   2549       if (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent())
   2550         return false;
   2551 
   2552     // Ignore ephemeral values which are deleted during codegen.
   2553     if (IsEphemeral(&I))
   2554       EphValues.insert(&I);
   2555     // We will delete Phis while threading, so Phis should not be accounted in
   2556     // block's size.
   2557     else if (!isa<PHINode>(I)) {
   2558       if (Size++ > MaxSmallBlockSize)
   2559         return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
   2560     }
   2561 
   2562     // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
   2563     // live outside of the current basic block.
   2564     for (User *U : I.users()) {
   2565       Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
   2566       if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
   2567         return false;
   2568     }
   2569 
   2570     // Looks ok, continue checking.
   2571   }
   2572 
   2573   return true;
   2574 }
   2575 
   2576 /// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
   2577 /// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
   2578 /// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
   2579 static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
   2580                                 const DataLayout &DL, AssumptionCache *AC) {
   2581   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   2582   PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
   2583   // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
   2584   // outside of the block.
   2585   if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
   2586     return false;
   2587 
   2588   // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
   2589   if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
   2590     FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
   2591     return true;
   2592   }
   2593 
   2594   // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
   2595   if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
   2596     return false;
   2597 
   2598   // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block.  See if any phi values are
   2599   // constants.
   2600   for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
   2601     ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
   2602     if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
   2603       continue;
   2604 
   2605     // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
   2606     // branch to RealDest.
   2607     BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
   2608     BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
   2609 
   2610     if (RealDest == BB)
   2611       continue; // Skip self loops.
   2612     // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
   2613     if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
   2614       continue;
   2615 
   2616     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 3> Updates;
   2617 
   2618     // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
   2619     // difficult cases.  Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
   2620     // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
   2621     // the edge we are about to create.
   2622     BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
   2623         BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
   2624                            RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
   2625     BranchInst *CritEdgeBranch = BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
   2626     if (DTU)
   2627       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, EdgeBB, RealDest});
   2628     CritEdgeBranch->setDebugLoc(BI->getDebugLoc());
   2629 
   2630     // Update PHI nodes.
   2631     AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
   2632 
   2633     // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over.  Clone these
   2634     // instructions into EdgeBB.  We know that there will be no uses of the
   2635     // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
   2636     BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
   2637     DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
   2638     for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
   2639       if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
   2640         TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
   2641         continue;
   2642       }
   2643       // Clone the instruction.
   2644       Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
   2645       if (BBI->hasName())
   2646         N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
   2647 
   2648       // Update operands due to translation.
   2649       for (Use &Op : N->operands()) {
   2650         DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(Op);
   2651         if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
   2652           Op = PI->second;
   2653       }
   2654 
   2655       // Check for trivial simplification.
   2656       if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
   2657         if (!BBI->use_empty())
   2658           TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
   2659         if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
   2660           N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
   2661           N = nullptr;
   2662         }
   2663       } else {
   2664         if (!BBI->use_empty())
   2665           TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
   2666       }
   2667       if (N) {
   2668         // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
   2669         EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
   2670 
   2671         // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
   2672         if (auto *Assume = dyn_cast<AssumeInst>(N))
   2673           if (AC)
   2674             AC->registerAssumption(Assume);
   2675       }
   2676     }
   2677 
   2678     // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
   2679     // to EdgeBB instead.
   2680     Instruction *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
   2681     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
   2682       if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
   2683         BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
   2684         PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
   2685       }
   2686 
   2687     if (DTU) {
   2688       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PredBB, EdgeBB});
   2689       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredBB, BB});
   2690 
   2691       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   2692     }
   2693 
   2694     // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
   2695     return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DTU, DL, AC) || true;
   2696   }
   2697 
   2698   return false;
   2699 }
   2700 
   2701 /// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
   2702 /// see if we can eliminate it.
   2703 static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
   2704                                 DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL) {
   2705   // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node.  Check to see if this is a simple "if
   2706   // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure.  Basically, we
   2707   // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
   2708   // subsequently causes this merge to happen.  We really want control
   2709   // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
   2710   // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
   2711   BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
   2712 
   2713   BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
   2714   Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
   2715   if (!IfCond ||
   2716       // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
   2717       isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
   2718     return false;
   2719 
   2720   // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
   2721   // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
   2722   // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
   2723   // doesn't support cmov's).  Only do this transformation if there are two or
   2724   // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
   2725   unsigned NumPhis = 0;
   2726   for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
   2727     if (NumPhis > 2)
   2728       return false;
   2729 
   2730   // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
   2731   // instructions.  While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
   2732   // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
   2733   SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
   2734   InstructionCost Cost = 0;
   2735   InstructionCost Budget =
   2736       TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
   2737 
   2738   bool Changed = false;
   2739   for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
   2740     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
   2741     if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
   2742       PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
   2743       PN->eraseFromParent();
   2744       Changed = true;
   2745       continue;
   2746     }
   2747 
   2748     if (!dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
   2749                              Cost, Budget, TTI) ||
   2750         !dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
   2751                              Cost, Budget, TTI))
   2752       return Changed;
   2753   }
   2754 
   2755   // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point.  Refresh it.  If
   2756   // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
   2757   PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
   2758   if (!PN)
   2759     return true;
   2760 
   2761   // Return true if at least one of these is a 'not', and another is either
   2762   // a 'not' too, or a constant.
   2763   auto CanHoistNotFromBothValues = [](Value *V0, Value *V1) {
   2764     if (!match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())))
   2765       std::swap(V0, V1);
   2766     auto Invertible = m_CombineOr(m_Not(m_Value()), m_AnyIntegralConstant());
   2767     return match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())) && match(V1, Invertible);
   2768   };
   2769 
   2770   // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators or
   2771   // select form of or/ands, unless one of the incoming values is an 'not' and
   2772   // another one is freely invertible.
   2773   // These can often be turned into switches and other things.
   2774   auto IsBinOpOrAnd = [](Value *V) {
   2775     return match(
   2776         V, m_CombineOr(m_BinOp(), m_CombineOr(m_LogicalAnd(), m_LogicalOr())));
   2777   };
   2778   if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
   2779       (IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
   2780        IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) || IsBinOpOrAnd(IfCond)) &&
   2781       !CanHoistNotFromBothValues(PN->getIncomingValue(0),
   2782                                  PN->getIncomingValue(1)))
   2783     return Changed;
   2784 
   2785   // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
   2786   // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
   2787   // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
   2788   // instructions.
   2789   BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
   2790   BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
   2791   BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
   2792   if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
   2793     IfBlock1 = nullptr;
   2794   } else {
   2795     DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
   2796     for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
   2797       if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) &&
   2798           !isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
   2799         // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
   2800         // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
   2801         // the xform is not worth it.
   2802         return Changed;
   2803       }
   2804   }
   2805 
   2806   if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
   2807     IfBlock2 = nullptr;
   2808   } else {
   2809     DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
   2810     for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
   2811       if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) &&
   2812           !isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
   2813         // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
   2814         // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
   2815         // the xform is not worth it.
   2816         return Changed;
   2817       }
   2818   }
   2819   assert(DomBlock && "Failed to find root DomBlock");
   2820 
   2821   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION!  " << *IfCond
   2822                     << "  T: " << IfTrue->getName()
   2823                     << "  F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
   2824 
   2825   // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
   2826   // do all of the PHI's now.
   2827   Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
   2828   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
   2829 
   2830   // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
   2831   // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
   2832   if (IfBlock1)
   2833     hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock1);
   2834   if (IfBlock2)
   2835     hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock2);
   2836 
   2837   // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi nodes to replacement selects.
   2838   IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
   2839   while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
   2840     if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
   2841       Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN->getFastMathFlags());
   2842 
   2843     // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
   2844     Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
   2845     Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
   2846 
   2847     Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
   2848     PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
   2849     Sel->takeName(PN);
   2850     PN->eraseFromParent();
   2851   }
   2852 
   2853   // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
   2854   // has been flattened.  Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
   2855   // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
   2856   Instruction *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
   2857   Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
   2858   Builder.CreateBr(BB);
   2859 
   2860   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 3> Updates;
   2861   if (DTU) {
   2862     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, DomBlock, BB});
   2863     for (auto *Successor : successors(DomBlock))
   2864       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, DomBlock, Successor});
   2865   }
   2866 
   2867   OldTI->eraseFromParent();
   2868   if (DTU)
   2869     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   2870 
   2871   return true;
   2872 }
   2873 
   2874 /// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
   2875 /// try to merge them together into one return,
   2876 /// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
   2877 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
   2878                                                     IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   2879   auto *BB = BI->getParent();
   2880   assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
   2881   BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
   2882   BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
   2883   // NOTE: destinations may match, this could be degenerate uncond branch.
   2884   ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
   2885   ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
   2886 
   2887   // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
   2888   // with PHI nodes.  If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
   2889   // computation on one path or the other.
   2890   if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
   2891     return false;
   2892   if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
   2893     return false;
   2894 
   2895   Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
   2896   // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes.  If
   2897   // there is no return value for this function, just change the
   2898   // branch into a return.
   2899   if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
   2900     TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
   2901     FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
   2902     Builder.CreateRetVoid();
   2903     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
   2904     if (DTU) {
   2905       SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
   2906       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, TrueSucc});
   2907       if (TrueSucc != FalseSucc)
   2908         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, FalseSucc});
   2909       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   2910     }
   2911     return true;
   2912   }
   2913 
   2914   // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
   2915   // so we can insert a new select instruction.
   2916   Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
   2917   Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
   2918 
   2919   // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
   2920   if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
   2921     if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
   2922       TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
   2923   if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
   2924     if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
   2925       FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
   2926 
   2927   // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
   2928   // unconditionally execute both operands to the return.  This is
   2929   // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
   2930   // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
   2931   // safe.
   2932   if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
   2933     if (TCV->canTrap())
   2934       return false;
   2935   if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
   2936     if (FCV->canTrap())
   2937       return false;
   2938 
   2939   // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
   2940   // defined to really do this transformation.  First, update the CFG.
   2941   TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
   2942   FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BB);
   2943 
   2944   // Insert select instructions where needed.
   2945   Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
   2946   if (TrueValue) {
   2947     // Insert a select if the results differ.
   2948     if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
   2949     } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
   2950       TrueValue = FalseValue;
   2951     } else {
   2952       TrueValue =
   2953           Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
   2954     }
   2955   }
   2956 
   2957   Value *RI =
   2958       !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
   2959 
   2960   (void)RI;
   2961 
   2962   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
   2963                     << "\n  " << *BI << "\nNewRet = " << *RI << "\nTRUEBLOCK: "
   2964                     << *TrueSucc << "\nFALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
   2965 
   2966   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
   2967   if (DTU) {
   2968     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
   2969     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, TrueSucc});
   2970     if (TrueSucc != FalseSucc)
   2971       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, FalseSucc});
   2972     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   2973   }
   2974 
   2975   return true;
   2976 }
   2977 
   2978 static Value *createLogicalOp(IRBuilderBase &Builder,
   2979                               Instruction::BinaryOps Opc, Value *LHS,
   2980                               Value *RHS, const Twine &Name = "") {
   2981   // Try to relax logical op to binary op.
   2982   if (impliesPoison(RHS, LHS))
   2983     return Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, LHS, RHS, Name);
   2984   if (Opc == Instruction::And)
   2985     return Builder.CreateLogicalAnd(LHS, RHS, Name);
   2986   if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
   2987     return Builder.CreateLogicalOr(LHS, RHS, Name);
   2988   llvm_unreachable("Invalid logical opcode");
   2989 }
   2990 
   2991 /// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
   2992 /// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
   2993 /// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
   2994 static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
   2995                                    uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
   2996                                    uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
   2997                                    uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
   2998                                    uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
   2999   bool PredHasWeights =
   3000       PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
   3001   bool SuccHasWeights =
   3002       BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
   3003   if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
   3004     if (!PredHasWeights)
   3005       PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
   3006     if (!SuccHasWeights)
   3007       SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
   3008     return true;
   3009   } else {
   3010     return false;
   3011   }
   3012 }
   3013 
   3014 /// Determine if the two branches share a common destination and deduce a glue
   3015 /// that joins the branches' conditions to arrive at the common destination if
   3016 /// that would be profitable.
   3017 static Optional<std::pair<Instruction::BinaryOps, bool>>
   3018 shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
   3019                                           const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
   3020   assert(BI && PBI && BI->isConditional() && PBI->isConditional() &&
   3021          "Both blocks must end with a conditional branches.");
   3022   assert(is_contained(predecessors(BI->getParent()), PBI->getParent()) &&
   3023          "PredBB must be a predecessor of BB.");
   3024 
   3025   // We have the potential to fold the conditions together, but if the
   3026   // predecessor branch is predictable, we may not want to merge them.
   3027   uint64_t PTWeight, PFWeight;
   3028   BranchProbability PBITrueProb, Likely;
   3029   if (TTI && PBI->extractProfMetadata(PTWeight, PFWeight) &&
   3030       (PTWeight + PFWeight) != 0) {
   3031     PBITrueProb =
   3032         BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(PTWeight, PTWeight + PFWeight);
   3033     Likely = TTI->getPredictableBranchThreshold();
   3034   }
   3035 
   3036   if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
   3037     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
   3038     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
   3039       return {{Instruction::Or, false}};
   3040   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
   3041     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
   3042     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
   3043       return {{Instruction::And, false}};
   3044   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
   3045     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
   3046     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
   3047       return {{Instruction::And, true}};
   3048   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
   3049     // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
   3050     if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
   3051       return {{Instruction::Or, true}};
   3052   }
   3053   return None;
   3054 }
   3055 
   3056 static bool performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
   3057                                              DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
   3058                                              MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
   3059                                              const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
   3060   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   3061   BasicBlock *PredBlock = PBI->getParent();
   3062 
   3063   // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
   3064   Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
   3065   bool InvertPredCond;
   3066   std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) =
   3067       *shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI);
   3068 
   3069   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
   3070 
   3071   IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
   3072   // The builder is used to create instructions to eliminate the branch in BB.
   3073   // If BB's terminator has !annotation metadata, add it to the new
   3074   // instructions.
   3075   Builder.CollectMetadataToCopy(BB->getTerminator(),
   3076                                 {LLVMContext::MD_annotation});
   3077 
   3078   // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
   3079   if (InvertPredCond) {
   3080     Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
   3081     if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
   3082       CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
   3083       CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
   3084     } else {
   3085       NewCond =
   3086           Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
   3087     }
   3088 
   3089     PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
   3090     PBI->swapSuccessors();
   3091   }
   3092 
   3093   BasicBlock *UniqueSucc =
   3094       PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(0) : BI->getSuccessor(1);
   3095 
   3096   // Before cloning instructions, notify the successor basic block that it
   3097   // is about to have a new predecessor. This will update PHI nodes,
   3098   // which will allow us to update live-out uses of bonus instructions.
   3099   AddPredecessorToBlock(UniqueSucc, PredBlock, BB, MSSAU);
   3100 
   3101   // Try to update branch weights.
   3102   uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
   3103   if (extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
   3104                              SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight)) {
   3105     SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
   3106 
   3107     if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
   3108       // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
   3109       // BI:  br i1 %y, UniqueSucc, FalseDest
   3110       // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
   3111       NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
   3112       // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
   3113       //               TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
   3114       // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
   3115       // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
   3116       NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
   3117                                (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
   3118                            PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
   3119     } else {
   3120       // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
   3121       // BI:  br i1 %y, TrueDest, UniqueSucc
   3122       // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
   3123       //              FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
   3124       NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
   3125                            PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
   3126       // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
   3127       NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
   3128     }
   3129 
   3130     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
   3131     FitWeights(NewWeights);
   3132 
   3133     SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(), NewWeights.end());
   3134     setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
   3135 
   3136     // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
   3137     // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
   3138   } else
   3139     PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
   3140 
   3141   // Now, update the CFG.
   3142   PBI->setSuccessor(PBI->getSuccessor(0) != BB, UniqueSucc);
   3143 
   3144   if (DTU)
   3145     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Insert, PredBlock, UniqueSucc},
   3146                        {DominatorTree::Delete, PredBlock, BB}});
   3147 
   3148   // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
   3149   // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
   3150   if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
   3151     PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
   3152 
   3153   ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
   3154   CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(BB, PredBlock, VMap);
   3155 
   3156   // Now that the Cond was cloned into the predecessor basic block,
   3157   // or/and the two conditions together.
   3158   Value *BICond = VMap[BI->getCondition()];
   3159   PBI->setCondition(
   3160       createLogicalOp(Builder, Opc, PBI->getCondition(), BICond, "or.cond"));
   3161 
   3162   // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
   3163   for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
   3164     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
   3165       Instruction *NewI = I.clone();
   3166       RemapInstruction(NewI, VMap,
   3167                        RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
   3168       NewI->insertBefore(PBI);
   3169     }
   3170   }
   3171 
   3172   ++NumFoldBranchToCommonDest;
   3173   return true;
   3174 }
   3175 
   3176 /// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
   3177 /// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
   3178 /// logical operations to pick the right destination.
   3179 bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
   3180                                   MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
   3181                                   const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
   3182                                   unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
   3183   // If this block ends with an unconditional branch,
   3184   // let SpeculativelyExecuteBB() deal with it.
   3185   if (!BI->isConditional())
   3186     return false;
   3187 
   3188   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   3189 
   3190   bool Changed = false;
   3191 
   3192   TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
   3193     BB->getParent()->hasMinSize() ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
   3194                                   : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
   3195 
   3196   Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
   3197 
   3198   if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
   3199       Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
   3200     return Changed;
   3201 
   3202   // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator.  Check to make sure that
   3203   // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
   3204   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
   3205     if (CE->canTrap())
   3206       return Changed;
   3207   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
   3208     if (CE->canTrap())
   3209       return Changed;
   3210 
   3211   // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
   3212   if (is_contained(successors(BB), BB))
   3213     return Changed;
   3214 
   3215   // With which predecessors will we want to deal with?
   3216   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds;
   3217   for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB)) {
   3218     BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
   3219 
   3220     // Check that we have two conditional branches.  If there is a PHI node in
   3221     // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
   3222     // blocks.
   3223     if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() || !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI))
   3224       continue;
   3225 
   3226     // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
   3227     Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
   3228     bool InvertPredCond;
   3229     if (auto Recipe = shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI))
   3230       std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) = *Recipe;
   3231     else
   3232       continue;
   3233 
   3234     // Check the cost of inserting the necessary logic before performing the
   3235     // transformation.
   3236     if (TTI) {
   3237       Type *Ty = BI->getCondition()->getType();
   3238       InstructionCost Cost = TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Opc, Ty, CostKind);
   3239       if (InvertPredCond && (!PBI->getCondition()->hasOneUse() ||
   3240           !isa<CmpInst>(PBI->getCondition())))
   3241         Cost += TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Instruction::Xor, Ty, CostKind);
   3242 
   3243       if (Cost > BranchFoldThreshold)
   3244         continue;
   3245     }
   3246 
   3247     // Ok, we do want to deal with this predecessor. Record it.
   3248     Preds.emplace_back(PredBlock);
   3249   }
   3250 
   3251   // If there aren't any predecessors into which we can fold,
   3252   // don't bother checking the cost.
   3253   if (Preds.empty())
   3254     return Changed;
   3255 
   3256   // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
   3257   // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
   3258   // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
   3259   // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
   3260   // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
   3261   // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
   3262   unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
   3263   const unsigned PredCount = Preds.size();
   3264   for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
   3265     // Don't check the branch condition comparison itself.
   3266     if (&I == Cond)
   3267       continue;
   3268     // Ignore dbg intrinsics, and the terminator.
   3269     if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) || isa<BranchInst>(I))
   3270       continue;
   3271     // I must be safe to execute unconditionally.
   3272     if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&I))
   3273       return Changed;
   3274 
   3275     // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
   3276     // predecessor.
   3277     NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
   3278     // Early exits once we reach the limit.
   3279     if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
   3280       return Changed;
   3281   }
   3282 
   3283   // Ok, we have the budget. Perform the transformation.
   3284   for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : Preds) {
   3285     auto *PBI = cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
   3286     return performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BI, PBI, DTU, MSSAU, TTI);
   3287   }
   3288   return Changed;
   3289 }
   3290 
   3291 // If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
   3292 // nullptr.
   3293 static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
   3294   StoreInst *S = nullptr;
   3295   for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
   3296     if (!BB)
   3297       continue;
   3298     for (auto &I : *BB)
   3299       if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
   3300         if (S)
   3301           // Multiple stores seen.
   3302           return nullptr;
   3303         else
   3304           S = SI;
   3305       }
   3306   }
   3307   return S;
   3308 }
   3309 
   3310 static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
   3311                                               Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
   3312   // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
   3313   // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
   3314   //
   3315   // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
   3316   // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
   3317   // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
   3318   // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
   3319   // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
   3320   // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
   3321   // one.
   3322   //
   3323   // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
   3324   // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
   3325   // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
   3326   PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
   3327   BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
   3328 
   3329   for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
   3330     if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
   3331       PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
   3332       if (!AlternativeV)
   3333         break;
   3334 
   3335       assert(Succ->hasNPredecessors(2));
   3336       auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
   3337       BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
   3338       if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
   3339         break;
   3340       PHI = nullptr;
   3341     }
   3342   if (PHI)
   3343     return PHI;
   3344 
   3345   // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
   3346   if (!AlternativeV &&
   3347       (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
   3348     return V;
   3349 
   3350   PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
   3351   PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
   3352   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
   3353     if (PredBB != BB)
   3354       PHI->addIncoming(
   3355           AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
   3356   return PHI;
   3357 }
   3358 
   3359 static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
   3360     BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB, BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
   3361     BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address, bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
   3362     DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   3363   // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
   3364   // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
   3365   // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
   3366   // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
   3367   // testing.
   3368   StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
   3369   StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
   3370   if (!PStore || !QStore)
   3371     return false;
   3372 
   3373   // Now check the stores are compatible.
   3374   if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
   3375     return false;
   3376 
   3377   // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
   3378   // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
   3379   // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
   3380   // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
   3381   // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
   3382   // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
   3383   // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
   3384   //
   3385   // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
   3386   // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
   3387   // check there are no other memory operations at all.
   3388   for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
   3389     if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
   3390       return false;
   3391   for (auto &I : *QFB)
   3392     if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
   3393       return false;
   3394   if (QTB)
   3395     for (auto &I : *QTB)
   3396       if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
   3397         return false;
   3398   for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
   3399        I != E; ++I)
   3400     if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
   3401       return false;
   3402 
   3403   // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
   3404   // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
   3405   auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB, ArrayRef<StoreInst *> FreeStores) {
   3406     if (!BB)
   3407       return true;
   3408     // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
   3409     // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
   3410     // thread this store.
   3411     InstructionCost Cost = 0;
   3412     InstructionCost Budget =
   3413         PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
   3414     for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
   3415       // Consider terminator instruction to be free.
   3416       if (I.isTerminator())
   3417         continue;
   3418       // If this is one the stores that we want to speculate out of this BB,
   3419       // then don't count it's cost, consider it to be free.
   3420       if (auto *S = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
   3421         if (llvm::find(FreeStores, S))
   3422           continue;
   3423       // Else, we have a white-list of instructions that we are ak speculating.
   3424       if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(I) && !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I))
   3425         return false; // Not in white-list - not worthwhile folding.
   3426       // And finally, if this is a non-free instruction that we are okay
   3427       // speculating, ensure that we consider the speculation budget.
   3428       Cost += TTI.getUserCost(&I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
   3429       if (Cost > Budget)
   3430         return false; // Eagerly refuse to fold as soon as we're out of budget.
   3431     }
   3432     assert(Cost <= Budget &&
   3433            "When we run out of budget we will eagerly return from within the "
   3434            "per-instruction loop.");
   3435     return true;
   3436   };
   3437 
   3438   const std::array<StoreInst *, 2> FreeStores = {PStore, QStore};
   3439   if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
   3440       (!IsWorthwhile(PTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB, FreeStores) ||
   3441        !IsWorthwhile(QTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(QFB, FreeStores)))
   3442     return false;
   3443 
   3444   // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
   3445   // sink the store.
   3446   if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
   3447     // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
   3448     // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
   3449     // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
   3450     // branch to QFB and PostBB.
   3451     BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
   3452     BasicBlock *NewBB =
   3453         SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, {QFB, TruePred}, "condstore.split", DTU);
   3454     if (!NewBB)
   3455       return false;
   3456     PostBB = NewBB;
   3457   }
   3458 
   3459   // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
   3460   // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
   3461   Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
   3462                      ->getCondition();
   3463   Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
   3464                      ->getCondition();
   3465 
   3466   Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
   3467                                                 PStore->getParent());
   3468   Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
   3469                                                 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
   3470 
   3471   IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
   3472 
   3473   Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
   3474   Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
   3475 
   3476   if (InvertPCond)
   3477     PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
   3478   if (InvertQCond)
   3479     QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
   3480   Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
   3481 
   3482   auto *T = SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(),
   3483                                       /*Unreachable=*/false,
   3484                                       /*BranchWeights=*/nullptr, DTU);
   3485   QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
   3486   StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
   3487   AAMDNodes AAMD;
   3488   PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
   3489   PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
   3490   SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
   3491   // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
   3492   // could use biggest one.  In this case, though, we only know that one of the
   3493   // stores executes.  And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
   3494   // store that doesn't execute.
   3495   SI->setAlignment(std::min(PStore->getAlign(), QStore->getAlign()));
   3496 
   3497   QStore->eraseFromParent();
   3498   PStore->eraseFromParent();
   3499 
   3500   return true;
   3501 }
   3502 
   3503 static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
   3504                                    DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
   3505                                    const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   3506   // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
   3507   // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
   3508   // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
   3509   // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
   3510   // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
   3511   // PBI and QBI.
   3512   //
   3513   // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
   3514   // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
   3515   // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
   3516   // sequences can be if-converted away.
   3517   //
   3518   // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
   3519   //
   3520   //     PBI       or      PBI        or a combination of the two
   3521   //    /   \               | \
   3522   //   PTB  PFB             |  PFB
   3523   //    \   /               | /
   3524   //     QBI                QBI
   3525   //    /  \                | \
   3526   //   QTB  QFB             |  QFB
   3527   //    \  /                | /
   3528   //    PostBB            PostBB
   3529   //
   3530   // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
   3531   // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
   3532   // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
   3533   BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
   3534   BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
   3535   BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
   3536   BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
   3537   BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
   3538 
   3539   // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
   3540   // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
   3541   if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
   3542     PostBB = QFB;
   3543 
   3544   // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
   3545   if (!PostBB)
   3546     return false;
   3547 
   3548   bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
   3549   // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
   3550   if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
   3551     std::swap(PFB, PTB);
   3552     InvertPCond = true;
   3553   }
   3554   if (QFB == PostBB) {
   3555     std::swap(QFB, QTB);
   3556     InvertQCond = true;
   3557   }
   3558 
   3559   // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
   3560   // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
   3561   if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
   3562     PTB = nullptr;
   3563   if (QTB == PostBB)
   3564     QTB = nullptr;
   3565 
   3566   // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
   3567   // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
   3568   // predecessor.
   3569   auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
   3570     return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
   3571   };
   3572   if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
   3573       !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
   3574     return false;
   3575   if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
   3576       (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
   3577     return false;
   3578   if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
   3579     return false;
   3580 
   3581   // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
   3582   // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
   3583   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
   3584   for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
   3585     if (!BB)
   3586       continue;
   3587     for (auto &I : *BB)
   3588       if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
   3589         PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
   3590   }
   3591   for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
   3592     if (!BB)
   3593       continue;
   3594     for (auto &I : *BB)
   3595       if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
   3596         QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
   3597   }
   3598 
   3599   set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
   3600   // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
   3601   // clear what it contains.
   3602   auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
   3603 
   3604   bool Changed = false;
   3605   for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
   3606     Changed |=
   3607         mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address,
   3608                                        InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DTU, DL, TTI);
   3609   return Changed;
   3610 }
   3611 
   3612 /// If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
   3613 /// the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
   3614 /// "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
   3615 static bool tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
   3616                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   3617   // TODO: This can be generalized in two important ways:
   3618   // 1) We can allow phi nodes in IfFalseBB and simply reuse all the input
   3619   //    values from the PBI edge.
   3620   // 2) We can sink side effecting instructions into BI's fallthrough
   3621   //    successor provided they doesn't contribute to computation of
   3622   //    BI's condition.
   3623   Value *CondWB, *WC;
   3624   BasicBlock *IfTrueBB, *IfFalseBB;
   3625   if (!parseWidenableBranch(PBI, CondWB, WC, IfTrueBB, IfFalseBB) ||
   3626       IfTrueBB != BI->getParent() || !BI->getParent()->getSinglePredecessor())
   3627     return false;
   3628   if (!IfFalseBB->phis().empty())
   3629     return false; // TODO
   3630   // Use lambda to lazily compute expensive condition after cheap ones.
   3631   auto NoSideEffects = [](BasicBlock &BB) {
   3632     return !llvm::any_of(BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
   3633         return I.mayWriteToMemory() || I.mayHaveSideEffects();
   3634       });
   3635   };
   3636   if (BI->getSuccessor(1) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
   3637       BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
   3638       NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
   3639     auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(1);
   3640     OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
   3641     BI->setSuccessor(1, IfFalseBB);
   3642     if (DTU)
   3643       DTU->applyUpdates(
   3644           {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
   3645            {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
   3646     return true;
   3647   }
   3648   if (BI->getSuccessor(0) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
   3649       BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
   3650       NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
   3651     auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(0);
   3652     OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
   3653     BI->setSuccessor(0, IfFalseBB);
   3654     if (DTU)
   3655       DTU->applyUpdates(
   3656           {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
   3657            {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
   3658     return true;
   3659   }
   3660   return false;
   3661 }
   3662 
   3663 /// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
   3664 /// this function tries to simplify it.  We know
   3665 /// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
   3666 /// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
   3667 static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
   3668                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
   3669                                            const DataLayout &DL,
   3670                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   3671   assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
   3672   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   3673 
   3674   // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
   3675   // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
   3676   // this conditional branch redundant.
   3677   if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
   3678       PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
   3679     // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
   3680     // knowable.  If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
   3681     if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
   3682       // Turn this into a branch on constant.
   3683       bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
   3684       BI->setCondition(
   3685           ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
   3686       return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
   3687     }
   3688 
   3689     // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
   3690     // in the constant and simplify the block result.  Subsequent passes of
   3691     // simplifycfg will thread the block.
   3692     if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
   3693       pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
   3694       PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
   3695           Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
   3696           BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
   3697       // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node.  Since PBI is not the only
   3698       // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
   3699       // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
   3700       for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
   3701         BasicBlock *P = *PI;
   3702         if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
   3703             PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
   3704             PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
   3705           bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
   3706           NewPN->addIncoming(
   3707               ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
   3708               P);
   3709         } else {
   3710           NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
   3711         }
   3712       }
   3713 
   3714       BI->setCondition(NewPN);
   3715       return true;
   3716     }
   3717   }
   3718 
   3719   // If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
   3720   // the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
   3721   // "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
   3722   if (tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU))
   3723     return true;
   3724 
   3725   if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
   3726     if (CE->canTrap())
   3727       return false;
   3728 
   3729   // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
   3730   // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
   3731   // merged store at the end.
   3732   if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
   3733     return true;
   3734 
   3735   // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
   3736   // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
   3737   // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
   3738 
   3739   // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
   3740   if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
   3741     return false;
   3742 
   3743   int PBIOp, BIOp;
   3744   if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
   3745     PBIOp = 0;
   3746     BIOp = 0;
   3747   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
   3748     PBIOp = 0;
   3749     BIOp = 1;
   3750   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
   3751     PBIOp = 1;
   3752     BIOp = 0;
   3753   } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
   3754     PBIOp = 1;
   3755     BIOp = 1;
   3756   } else {
   3757     return false;
   3758   }
   3759 
   3760   // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
   3761   // isn't BB itself.  If so, this is an infinite loop that will
   3762   // keep getting unwound.
   3763   if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
   3764     return false;
   3765 
   3766   // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
   3767   // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
   3768   // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
   3769 
   3770   // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
   3771   // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
   3772   // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
   3773 
   3774   BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
   3775   BasicBlock *RemovedDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp ^ 1);
   3776   unsigned NumPhis = 0;
   3777   for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
   3778        ++II, ++NumPhis) {
   3779     if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
   3780       return false;
   3781 
   3782     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
   3783     Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
   3784     if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
   3785       if (CE->canTrap())
   3786         return false;
   3787 
   3788     unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
   3789     Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
   3790     if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
   3791       if (CE->canTrap())
   3792         return false;
   3793   }
   3794 
   3795   // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
   3796   BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
   3797 
   3798   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
   3799                     << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
   3800 
   3801   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 5> Updates;
   3802 
   3803   // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
   3804   // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
   3805   // exits.  We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
   3806   // (even though that seems likely).  If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
   3807   // recursively unpeeling the loop.  Since we know that (after the xform is
   3808   // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
   3809   // infinite loop with no cond branch.
   3810   if (OtherDest == BB) {
   3811     // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
   3812     // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
   3813     BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
   3814         BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
   3815     BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
   3816     if (DTU)
   3817       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
   3818     OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
   3819   }
   3820 
   3821   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
   3822 
   3823   // BI may have other predecessors.  Because of this, we leave
   3824   // it alone, but modify PBI.
   3825 
   3826   // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
   3827   Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
   3828   IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
   3829   if (PBIOp)
   3830     PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
   3831 
   3832   Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
   3833   if (BIOp)
   3834     BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
   3835 
   3836   // Merge the conditions.
   3837   Value *Cond =
   3838       createLogicalOp(Builder, Instruction::Or, PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
   3839 
   3840   // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
   3841   PBI->setCondition(Cond);
   3842   PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
   3843   PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
   3844 
   3845   if (DTU) {
   3846     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PBI->getParent(), OtherDest});
   3847     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PBI->getParent(), RemovedDest});
   3848 
   3849     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   3850   }
   3851 
   3852   // Update branch weight for PBI.
   3853   uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
   3854   uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
   3855   bool HasWeights =
   3856       extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
   3857                              SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
   3858   if (HasWeights) {
   3859     PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
   3860     PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
   3861     SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
   3862     SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
   3863     // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
   3864     //                                    PredOther * SuccCommon.
   3865     // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
   3866     uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
   3867                                   PredOther * SuccCommon,
   3868                               PredOther * SuccOther};
   3869     // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
   3870     FitWeights(NewWeights);
   3871 
   3872     setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
   3873   }
   3874 
   3875   // OtherDest may have phi nodes.  If so, add an entry from PBI's
   3876   // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
   3877   AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
   3878 
   3879   // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
   3880   // it.  If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
   3881   // entries for BB and PBI's BB.  If so, insert a select to make
   3882   // them agree.
   3883   for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
   3884     Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
   3885     unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
   3886     Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
   3887     if (BIV != PBIV) {
   3888       // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
   3889       SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
   3890           Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
   3891       PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
   3892       // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
   3893       // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
   3894       // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
   3895       // the outgoing edges of PBI.
   3896       if (HasWeights) {
   3897         uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
   3898         uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
   3899         uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
   3900         uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
   3901         // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
   3902         // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
   3903         uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
   3904                                   PredOther * SuccCommon};
   3905 
   3906         FitWeights(NewWeights);
   3907 
   3908         setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
   3909       }
   3910     }
   3911   }
   3912 
   3913   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
   3914   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
   3915 
   3916   // This basic block is probably dead.  We know it has at least
   3917   // one fewer predecessor.
   3918   return true;
   3919 }
   3920 
   3921 // Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
   3922 // true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
   3923 // Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
   3924 // Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
   3925 // non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
   3926 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm,
   3927                                                 Value *Cond, BasicBlock *TrueBB,
   3928                                                 BasicBlock *FalseBB,
   3929                                                 uint32_t TrueWeight,
   3930                                                 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
   3931   auto *BB = OldTerm->getParent();
   3932   // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
   3933   // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
   3934   // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
   3935   // successor.
   3936   BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
   3937   BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
   3938 
   3939   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccessors;
   3940 
   3941   // Then remove the rest.
   3942   for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
   3943     // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
   3944     if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
   3945       KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
   3946     else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
   3947       KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
   3948     else {
   3949       Succ->removePredecessor(BB,
   3950                               /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
   3951 
   3952       if (Succ != TrueBB && Succ != FalseBB)
   3953         RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ);
   3954     }
   3955   }
   3956 
   3957   IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
   3958   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
   3959 
   3960   // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
   3961   if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
   3962     if (TrueBB == FalseBB) {
   3963       // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
   3964       // Create an unconditional branch to it.
   3965       Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
   3966     } else {
   3967       // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
   3968       // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
   3969       BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
   3970       if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
   3971         setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
   3972     }
   3973   } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
   3974     // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
   3975     // terminator must be unreachable.
   3976     new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
   3977   } else {
   3978     // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
   3979     // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
   3980     // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
   3981     if (!KeepEdge1) {
   3982       // Only TrueBB was found.
   3983       Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
   3984     } else {
   3985       // Only FalseBB was found.
   3986       Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
   3987     }
   3988   }
   3989 
   3990   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
   3991 
   3992   if (DTU) {
   3993     SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
   3994     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccessors.size());
   3995     for (auto *RemovedSuccessor : RemovedSuccessors)
   3996       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSuccessor});
   3997     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   3998   }
   3999 
   4000   return true;
   4001 }
   4002 
   4003 // Replaces
   4004 //   (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
   4005 // with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
   4006 // unconditional otherwise.
   4007 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI,
   4008                                             SelectInst *Select) {
   4009   // Check for constant integer values in the select.
   4010   ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
   4011   ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
   4012   if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
   4013     return false;
   4014 
   4015   // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
   4016   Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
   4017   BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
   4018   BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
   4019 
   4020   // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
   4021   uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
   4022   SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
   4023   bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
   4024   if (HasWeights) {
   4025     GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
   4026     if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
   4027       TrueWeight =
   4028           (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
   4029       FalseWeight =
   4030           (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
   4031     }
   4032   }
   4033 
   4034   // Perform the actual simplification.
   4035   return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
   4036                                     FalseWeight);
   4037 }
   4038 
   4039 // Replaces
   4040 //   (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
   4041 //                             blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
   4042 // with
   4043 //   (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
   4044 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI,
   4045                                                 SelectInst *SI) {
   4046   // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
   4047   BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
   4048   BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
   4049   if (!TBA || !FBA)
   4050     return false;
   4051 
   4052   // Extract the actual blocks.
   4053   BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
   4054   BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
   4055 
   4056   // Perform the actual simplification.
   4057   return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
   4058                                     0);
   4059 }
   4060 
   4061 /// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
   4062 /// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
   4063 /// block that ends with an uncond branch.  We are looking for a very specific
   4064 /// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified.  In
   4065 /// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
   4066 /// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
   4067 /// like:
   4068 ///
   4069 ///   switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end    i8 2, label %end ]
   4070 /// DEFAULT:
   4071 ///   %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
   4072 ///   br label %end
   4073 /// end:
   4074 ///   ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
   4075 ///
   4076 /// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
   4077 /// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
   4078 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
   4079     ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   4080   BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
   4081 
   4082   // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
   4083   // complex.
   4084   if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
   4085     return false;
   4086 
   4087   Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
   4088   ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
   4089 
   4090   // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
   4091   // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch.  In this case we can
   4092   // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
   4093   BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
   4094   if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
   4095     return false;
   4096 
   4097   SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
   4098   if (SI->getCondition() != V)
   4099     return false;
   4100 
   4101   // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
   4102   // V in this block.  Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
   4103   // away.
   4104   if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
   4105     ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
   4106     assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
   4107     ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
   4108 
   4109     if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
   4110       ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
   4111       ICI->eraseFromParent();
   4112     }
   4113     // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
   4114     return requestResimplify();
   4115   }
   4116 
   4117   // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest.  If the constant we're
   4118   // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
   4119   // and zap it.
   4120   if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
   4121     Value *V;
   4122     if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
   4123       V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
   4124     else
   4125       V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
   4126 
   4127     ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
   4128     ICI->eraseFromParent();
   4129     // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
   4130     return requestResimplify();
   4131   }
   4132 
   4133   // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
   4134   // the block.
   4135   BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
   4136   PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
   4137   if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
   4138       isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
   4139     return false;
   4140 
   4141   // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
   4142   // true in the PHI.
   4143   Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
   4144   Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
   4145 
   4146   if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
   4147     std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
   4148 
   4149   // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
   4150   // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
   4151   ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
   4152   ICI->eraseFromParent();
   4153 
   4154   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
   4155 
   4156   // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value.  Add an edge from
   4157   // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
   4158   BasicBlock *NewBB =
   4159       BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
   4160   {
   4161     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
   4162     auto W0 = SIW.getSuccessorWeight(0);
   4163     SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper::CaseWeightOpt NewW;
   4164     if (W0) {
   4165       NewW = ((uint64_t(*W0) + 1) >> 1);
   4166       SIW.setSuccessorWeight(0, *NewW);
   4167     }
   4168     SIW.addCase(Cst, NewBB, NewW);
   4169     if (DTU)
   4170       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewBB});
   4171   }
   4172 
   4173   // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
   4174   Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
   4175   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
   4176   Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
   4177   PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
   4178   if (DTU) {
   4179     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, NewBB, SuccBlock});
   4180     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4181   }
   4182   return true;
   4183 }
   4184 
   4185 /// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
   4186 /// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
   4187 /// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
   4188 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI,
   4189                                                IRBuilder<> &Builder,
   4190                                                const DataLayout &DL) {
   4191   Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
   4192   if (!Cond)
   4193     return false;
   4194 
   4195   // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
   4196   // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
   4197   // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
   4198 
   4199   // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
   4200   ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
   4201   // Unpack the result
   4202   SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
   4203   Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
   4204   unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
   4205   Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
   4206 
   4207   // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
   4208   if (!CompVal)
   4209     return false;
   4210 
   4211   // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
   4212   if (UsedICmps <= 1)
   4213     return false;
   4214 
   4215   bool TrueWhenEqual = match(Cond, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
   4216 
   4217   // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
   4218   // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
   4219   array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
   4220   Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
   4221 
   4222   // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
   4223   // transformation.  A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
   4224   if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
   4225     return false;
   4226 
   4227   // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
   4228   // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
   4229 
   4230   // Figure out which block is which destination.
   4231   BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
   4232   BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
   4233   if (!TrueWhenEqual)
   4234     std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
   4235 
   4236   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   4237 
   4238   // MSAN does not like undefs as branch condition which can be introduced
   4239   // with "explicit branch".
   4240   if (ExtraCase && BB->getParent()->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::SanitizeMemory))
   4241     return false;
   4242 
   4243   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
   4244                     << " cases into SWITCH.  BB is:\n"
   4245                     << *BB);
   4246 
   4247   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
   4248 
   4249   // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
   4250   // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
   4251   // right before the condbr to handle it.
   4252   if (ExtraCase) {
   4253     BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlock(BB, BI, DTU, /*LI=*/nullptr,
   4254                                    /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, "switch.early.test");
   4255 
   4256     // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
   4257     Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
   4258     Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
   4259 
   4260     if (TrueWhenEqual)
   4261       Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
   4262     else
   4263       Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
   4264 
   4265     OldTI->eraseFromParent();
   4266 
   4267     if (DTU)
   4268       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, EdgeBB});
   4269 
   4270     // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
   4271     // for the edge we just added.
   4272     AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
   4273 
   4274     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
   4275                       << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
   4276     BB = NewBB;
   4277   }
   4278 
   4279   Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
   4280   // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
   4281   if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
   4282     CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
   4283         CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
   4284   }
   4285 
   4286   // Create the new switch instruction now.
   4287   SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
   4288 
   4289   // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
   4290   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
   4291     New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
   4292 
   4293   // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB.  As such, if there were any
   4294   // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
   4295   // the number of edges added.
   4296   for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
   4297     PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
   4298     Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
   4299     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
   4300       PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
   4301   }
   4302 
   4303   // Erase the old branch instruction.
   4304   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
   4305   if (DTU)
   4306     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4307 
   4308   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
   4309   return true;
   4310 }
   4311 
   4312 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   4313   if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
   4314     return simplifyCommonResume(RI);
   4315   else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
   4316            RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
   4317     // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
   4318     return simplifySingleResume(RI);
   4319 
   4320   return false;
   4321 }
   4322 
   4323 // Check if cleanup block is empty
   4324 static bool isCleanupBlockEmpty(iterator_range<BasicBlock::iterator> R) {
   4325   for (Instruction &I : R) {
   4326     auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(&I);
   4327     if (!II)
   4328       return false;
   4329 
   4330     Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
   4331     switch (IntrinsicID) {
   4332     case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
   4333     case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
   4334     case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
   4335     case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
   4336       break;
   4337     default:
   4338       return false;
   4339     }
   4340   }
   4341   return true;
   4342 }
   4343 
   4344 // Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
   4345 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
   4346   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
   4347 
   4348   // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug and lifetime
   4349   // intrinsics between the phi's and resume instruction.
   4350   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
   4351           make_range(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI(), BB->getTerminator())))
   4352     return false;
   4353 
   4354   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
   4355   auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
   4356 
   4357   // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
   4358   for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
   4359        Idx++) {
   4360     auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
   4361     auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
   4362 
   4363     // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
   4364     // it has other dependents.
   4365     if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
   4366       continue;
   4367 
   4368     auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
   4369     // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
   4370     if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
   4371       continue;
   4372 
   4373     if (isCleanupBlockEmpty(
   4374             make_range(LandingPad->getNextNode(), IncomingBB->getTerminator())))
   4375       TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
   4376   }
   4377 
   4378   // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
   4379   if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
   4380     return false;
   4381 
   4382   // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
   4383   for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
   4384     // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
   4385     // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
   4386     // to remove them all.
   4387     while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
   4388       BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
   4389 
   4390     for (BasicBlock *Pred :
   4391          llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(TrivialBB))) {
   4392       removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
   4393       ++NumInvokes;
   4394     }
   4395 
   4396     // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
   4397     // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
   4398     // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
   4399     // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
   4400     // predecessors.
   4401     TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
   4402     new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
   4403     if (DTU)
   4404       DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, TrivialBB, BB}});
   4405   }
   4406 
   4407   // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
   4408   if (pred_empty(BB))
   4409     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
   4410 
   4411   return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
   4412 }
   4413 
   4414 // Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
   4415 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
   4416   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
   4417   auto *LPInst = cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
   4418   assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
   4419          "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
   4420 
   4421   // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
   4422   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
   4423           make_range<Instruction *>(LPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
   4424     return false;
   4425 
   4426   // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
   4427   for (BasicBlock *Pred : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
   4428     removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
   4429     ++NumInvokes;
   4430   }
   4431 
   4432   // The landingpad is now unreachable.  Zap it.
   4433   DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
   4434   return true;
   4435 }
   4436 
   4437 static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   4438   // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
   4439   // eliminated.  If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
   4440   // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
   4441   // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
   4442   // instruction converted to a call instruction.  If the cleanup pad being
   4443   // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
   4444   // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
   4445   // simplified.
   4446   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
   4447   CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
   4448   if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
   4449     // This isn't an empty cleanup.
   4450     return false;
   4451 
   4452   // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses.  This typically arises
   4453   // from unreachable basic blocks.
   4454   if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
   4455     return false;
   4456 
   4457   // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
   4458   if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
   4459           make_range<Instruction *>(CPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
   4460     return false;
   4461 
   4462   // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
   4463   // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
   4464   BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
   4465   Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
   4466 
   4467   // We're about to remove BB from the control flow.  Before we do, sink any
   4468   // PHINodes into the unwind destination.  Doing this before changing the
   4469   // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
   4470   // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
   4471   // are both EH pads).
   4472   if (UnwindDest) {
   4473     // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
   4474     // reference the block we are removing
   4475     for (PHINode &DestPN : UnwindDest->phis()) {
   4476       int Idx = DestPN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
   4477       // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
   4478       assert(Idx != -1);
   4479       // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
   4480       // path through the cleanup pad we are removing.  If the incoming
   4481       // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
   4482       // verified above that the block is otherwise empty).  Otherwise, the
   4483       // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
   4484       // pad being removed.
   4485       //
   4486       // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
   4487       // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
   4488       // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
   4489       // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
   4490       Value *SrcVal = DestPN.getIncomingValue(Idx);
   4491       PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
   4492 
   4493       bool NeedPHITranslation = SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB;
   4494       for (auto *Pred : predecessors(BB)) {
   4495         Value *Incoming =
   4496             NeedPHITranslation ? SrcPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred) : SrcVal;
   4497         DestPN.addIncoming(Incoming, Pred);
   4498       }
   4499     }
   4500 
   4501     // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
   4502     Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
   4503     for (PHINode &PN : BB->phis()) {
   4504       // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
   4505       // being moved to another block.
   4506       if (PN.use_empty() || !PN.isUsedOutsideOfBlock(BB))
   4507         // If the PHI node has no uses or all of its uses are in this basic
   4508         // block (meaning they are debug or lifetime intrinsics), just leave
   4509         // it.  It will be erased when we erase BB below.
   4510         continue;
   4511 
   4512       // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
   4513       // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
   4514       // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
   4515       // BB.  In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
   4516       for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
   4517         if (pred != BB)
   4518           PN.addIncoming(&PN, pred);
   4519       PN.moveBefore(InsertPt);
   4520       // Also, add a dummy incoming value for the original BB itself,
   4521       // so that the PHI is well-formed until we drop said predecessor.
   4522       PN.addIncoming(UndefValue::get(PN.getType()), BB);
   4523     }
   4524   }
   4525 
   4526   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   4527 
   4528   // We use make_early_inc_range here because we will remove all predecessors.
   4529   for (BasicBlock *PredBB : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
   4530     if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
   4531       if (DTU) {
   4532         DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4533         Updates.clear();
   4534       }
   4535       removeUnwindEdge(PredBB, DTU);
   4536       ++NumInvokes;
   4537     } else {
   4538       BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
   4539       Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
   4540       TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
   4541       if (DTU) {
   4542         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PredBB, UnwindDest});
   4543         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredBB, BB});
   4544       }
   4545     }
   4546   }
   4547 
   4548   if (DTU)
   4549     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4550 
   4551   DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
   4552 
   4553   return true;
   4554 }
   4555 
   4556 // Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
   4557 static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
   4558   // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
   4559   // with.
   4560   BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
   4561   if (!UnwindDest)
   4562     return false;
   4563 
   4564   // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
   4565   // be safe to merge without code duplication.
   4566   if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
   4567     return false;
   4568 
   4569   // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
   4570   auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
   4571   if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
   4572     return false;
   4573 
   4574   CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
   4575   // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
   4576   // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
   4577   // funclet bundle operands.
   4578   SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
   4579   // Remove the old cleanuppad.
   4580   SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
   4581   // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
   4582   // destination.
   4583   BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
   4584   RI->eraseFromParent();
   4585 
   4586   return true;
   4587 }
   4588 
   4589 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
   4590   // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
   4591   // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
   4592   // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
   4593   if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
   4594     return false;
   4595 
   4596   if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
   4597     return true;
   4598 
   4599   if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI, DTU))
   4600     return true;
   4601 
   4602   return false;
   4603 }
   4604 
   4605 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   4606   BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
   4607   if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
   4608     return false;
   4609 
   4610   // Find predecessors that end with branches.
   4611   SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
   4612   SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
   4613   for (BasicBlock *P : predecessors(BB)) {
   4614     Instruction *PTI = P->getTerminator();
   4615     if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
   4616       if (BI->isUnconditional())
   4617         UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
   4618       else
   4619         CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
   4620     }
   4621   }
   4622 
   4623   // If we found some, do the transformation!
   4624   if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
   4625     while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
   4626       BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
   4627       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
   4628                         << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
   4629       (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred, DTU);
   4630     }
   4631 
   4632     // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
   4633     if (pred_empty(BB))
   4634       DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
   4635 
   4636     return true;
   4637   }
   4638 
   4639   // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
   4640   // instruction.  If any of them just select between returns, change the
   4641   // branch itself into a select/return pair.
   4642   while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
   4643     BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
   4644 
   4645     // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
   4646     if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
   4647         isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
   4648         SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
   4649       return true;
   4650   }
   4651   return false;
   4652 }
   4653 
   4654 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
   4655   BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
   4656 
   4657   bool Changed = false;
   4658 
   4659   // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
   4660   // be removed, do so.
   4661   while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
   4662     BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
   4663     --BBI;
   4664     // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
   4665     // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
   4666     // operations may have this effect.
   4667     if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
   4668       break;
   4669 
   4670     if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
   4671       if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
   4672         if (SI->isVolatile())
   4673           break;
   4674       } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
   4675         if (LI->isVolatile())
   4676           break;
   4677       } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
   4678         if (RMWI->isVolatile())
   4679           break;
   4680       } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
   4681         if (CXI->isVolatile())
   4682           break;
   4683       } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
   4684         // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
   4685         // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
   4686         // default.
   4687         // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
   4688         if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
   4689             EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
   4690           break;
   4691       } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
   4692                  !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
   4693         break;
   4694       }
   4695       // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
   4696       // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
   4697       // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
   4698       // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
   4699     }
   4700 
   4701     // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
   4702     if (!BBI->use_empty())
   4703       BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
   4704     BBI->eraseFromParent();
   4705     Changed = true;
   4706   }
   4707 
   4708   // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
   4709   // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
   4710   if (&BB->front() != UI)
   4711     return Changed;
   4712 
   4713   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   4714 
   4715   SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
   4716   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
   4717     auto *Predecessor = Preds[i];
   4718     Instruction *TI = Predecessor->getTerminator();
   4719     IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
   4720     if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
   4721       // We could either have a proper unconditional branch,
   4722       // or a degenerate conditional branch with matching destinations.
   4723       if (all_of(BI->successors(),
   4724                  [BB](auto *Successor) { return Successor == BB; })) {
   4725         new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
   4726         TI->eraseFromParent();
   4727         Changed = true;
   4728       } else {
   4729         assert(BI->isConditional() && "Can't get here with an uncond branch.");
   4730         Value* Cond = BI->getCondition();
   4731         assert(BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1) &&
   4732                "The destinations are guaranteed to be different here.");
   4733         if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
   4734           Builder.CreateAssumption(Builder.CreateNot(Cond));
   4735           Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
   4736         } else {
   4737           assert(BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB && "Incorrect CFG");
   4738           Builder.CreateAssumption(Cond);
   4739           Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
   4740         }
   4741         EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
   4742         Changed = true;
   4743       }
   4744       if (DTU)
   4745         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
   4746     } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
   4747       SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SU(*SI);
   4748       for (auto i = SU->case_begin(), e = SU->case_end(); i != e;) {
   4749         if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
   4750           ++i;
   4751           continue;
   4752         }
   4753         BB->removePredecessor(SU->getParent());
   4754         i = SU.removeCase(i);
   4755         e = SU->case_end();
   4756         Changed = true;
   4757       }
   4758       // Note that the default destination can't be removed!
   4759       if (DTU && SI->getDefaultDest() != BB)
   4760         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
   4761     } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
   4762       if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
   4763         if (DTU) {
   4764           DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4765           Updates.clear();
   4766         }
   4767         removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
   4768         Changed = true;
   4769       }
   4770     } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
   4771       if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
   4772         if (DTU) {
   4773           DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4774           Updates.clear();
   4775         }
   4776         removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
   4777         Changed = true;
   4778         continue;
   4779       }
   4780 
   4781       for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
   4782                                              E = CSI->handler_end();
   4783            I != E; ++I) {
   4784         if (*I == BB) {
   4785           CSI->removeHandler(I);
   4786           --I;
   4787           --E;
   4788           Changed = true;
   4789         }
   4790       }
   4791       if (DTU)
   4792         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
   4793       if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
   4794         if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
   4795           // Redirect all predecessors of the block containing CatchSwitchInst
   4796           // to instead branch to the CatchSwitchInst's unwind destination.
   4797           if (DTU) {
   4798             for (auto *PredecessorOfPredecessor : predecessors(Predecessor)) {
   4799               Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert,
   4800                                  PredecessorOfPredecessor,
   4801                                  CSI->getUnwindDest()});
   4802               Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete,
   4803                                  PredecessorOfPredecessor, Predecessor});
   4804             }
   4805           }
   4806           Predecessor->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
   4807         } else {
   4808           // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
   4809           if (DTU) {
   4810             DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4811             Updates.clear();
   4812           }
   4813           SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(Predecessor));
   4814           for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
   4815             removeUnwindEdge(EHPred, DTU);
   4816         }
   4817         // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
   4818         new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
   4819         CSI->eraseFromParent();
   4820         Changed = true;
   4821       }
   4822     } else if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
   4823       (void)CRI;
   4824       assert(CRI->hasUnwindDest() && CRI->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
   4825              "Expected to always have an unwind to BB.");
   4826       if (DTU)
   4827         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
   4828       new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
   4829       TI->eraseFromParent();
   4830       Changed = true;
   4831     }
   4832   }
   4833 
   4834   if (DTU)
   4835     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4836 
   4837   // If this block is now dead, remove it.
   4838   if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
   4839     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
   4840     return true;
   4841   }
   4842 
   4843   return Changed;
   4844 }
   4845 
   4846 static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
   4847   assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
   4848 
   4849   array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
   4850   for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
   4851     if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
   4852       return false;
   4853   }
   4854   return true;
   4855 }
   4856 
   4857 static void createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SwitchInst *Switch,
   4858                                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   4859   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
   4860   auto *BB = Switch->getParent();
   4861   BasicBlock *NewDefaultBlock = SplitBlockPredecessors(
   4862       Switch->getDefaultDest(), Switch->getParent(), "", DTU);
   4863   auto *OrigDefaultBlock = Switch->getDefaultDest();
   4864   Switch->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefaultBlock);
   4865   if (DTU)
   4866     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Insert, BB, &*NewDefaultBlock},
   4867                        {DominatorTree::Delete, BB, OrigDefaultBlock}});
   4868   SplitBlock(&*NewDefaultBlock, &NewDefaultBlock->front(), DTU);
   4869   SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
   4870   if (DTU)
   4871     for (auto *Successor : successors(NewDefaultBlock))
   4872       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, NewDefaultBlock, Successor});
   4873   auto *NewTerminator = NewDefaultBlock->getTerminator();
   4874   new UnreachableInst(Switch->getContext(), NewTerminator);
   4875   EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(NewTerminator);
   4876   if (DTU)
   4877     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   4878 }
   4879 
   4880 /// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
   4881 /// comparison and branch.
   4882 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI,
   4883                                              IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   4884   assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
   4885 
   4886   bool HasDefault =
   4887       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
   4888 
   4889   auto *BB = SI->getParent();
   4890 
   4891   // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
   4892   BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
   4893   BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
   4894   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
   4895   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
   4896 
   4897   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
   4898     BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
   4899     if (!DestA)
   4900       DestA = Dest;
   4901     if (Dest == DestA) {
   4902       CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
   4903       continue;
   4904     }
   4905     if (!DestB)
   4906       DestB = Dest;
   4907     if (Dest == DestB) {
   4908       CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
   4909       continue;
   4910     }
   4911     return false; // More than two destinations.
   4912   }
   4913 
   4914   assert(DestA && DestB &&
   4915          "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
   4916   assert(DestA != DestB);
   4917   assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
   4918   assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
   4919   assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
   4920 
   4921   // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
   4922   SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
   4923   BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
   4924   BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
   4925   if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
   4926     ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
   4927     ContiguousDest = DestA;
   4928     OtherDest = DestB;
   4929   } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
   4930     ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
   4931     ContiguousDest = DestB;
   4932     OtherDest = DestA;
   4933   } else
   4934     return false;
   4935 
   4936   // Start building the compare and branch.
   4937 
   4938   Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
   4939   Constant *NumCases =
   4940       ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
   4941 
   4942   Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
   4943   if (!Offset->isNullValue())
   4944     Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
   4945 
   4946   Value *Cmp;
   4947   // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
   4948   if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
   4949     Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
   4950   else
   4951     Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
   4952   BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
   4953 
   4954   // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
   4955   if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
   4956     SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
   4957     GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
   4958     if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
   4959       uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
   4960       uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
   4961       for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
   4962         if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
   4963           TrueWeight += Weights[I];
   4964         else
   4965           FalseWeight += Weights[I];
   4966       }
   4967       while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
   4968         TrueWeight /= 2;
   4969         FalseWeight /= 2;
   4970       }
   4971       setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
   4972     }
   4973   }
   4974 
   4975   // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
   4976   for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
   4977     unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
   4978     if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
   4979       ++PreviousEdges;
   4980     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
   4981       cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
   4982   }
   4983   for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
   4984     unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
   4985     if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
   4986       ++PreviousEdges;
   4987     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
   4988       cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
   4989   }
   4990 
   4991   // Clean up the default block - it may have phis or other instructions before
   4992   // the unreachable terminator.
   4993   if (!HasDefault)
   4994     createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
   4995 
   4996   auto *UnreachableDefault = SI->getDefaultDest();
   4997 
   4998   // Drop the switch.
   4999   SI->eraseFromParent();
   5000 
   5001   if (!HasDefault && DTU)
   5002     DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, BB, UnreachableDefault}});
   5003 
   5004   return true;
   5005 }
   5006 
   5007 /// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
   5008 /// and use it to remove dead cases.
   5009 static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
   5010                                      AssumptionCache *AC,
   5011                                      const DataLayout &DL) {
   5012   Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
   5013   unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
   5014   KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
   5015 
   5016   // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
   5017   // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
   5018   // bits are in the condition value.
   5019   unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
   5020   unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
   5021 
   5022   // Gather dead cases.
   5023   SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
   5024   SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
   5025   for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
   5026     auto *Successor = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
   5027     if (DTU)
   5028       ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
   5029     const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
   5030     if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
   5031         (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
   5032       DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
   5033       if (DTU)
   5034         --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
   5035       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
   5036                         << " is dead.\n");
   5037     }
   5038   }
   5039 
   5040   // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
   5041   // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it.  If we know some
   5042   // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
   5043   // number of possible unique case values.
   5044   bool HasDefault =
   5045       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
   5046   const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
   5047       Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
   5048   assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
   5049   if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
   5050       NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
   5051       SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
   5052     createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
   5053     return true;
   5054   }
   5055 
   5056   if (DeadCases.empty())
   5057     return false;
   5058 
   5059   SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
   5060   for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
   5061     SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
   5062     assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
   5063            "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
   5064     // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
   5065     CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
   5066     SIW.removeCase(CaseI);
   5067   }
   5068 
   5069   if (DTU) {
   5070     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   5071     for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int> &I : NumPerSuccessorCases)
   5072       if (I.second == 0)
   5073         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SI->getParent(), I.first});
   5074     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   5075   }
   5076 
   5077   return true;
   5078 }
   5079 
   5080 /// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
   5081 /// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
   5082 /// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
   5083 /// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
   5084 /// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
   5085 static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
   5086                                               BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
   5087   if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
   5088     return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
   5089   if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
   5090     return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
   5091 
   5092   BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
   5093   if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
   5094     return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
   5095 
   5096   BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
   5097 
   5098   for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
   5099     int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
   5100     assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
   5101 
   5102     Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
   5103     if (InValue != CaseValue)
   5104       continue;
   5105 
   5106     *PhiIndex = Idx;
   5107     return &PHI;
   5108   }
   5109 
   5110   return nullptr;
   5111 }
   5112 
   5113 /// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
   5114 /// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
   5115 /// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
   5116 static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
   5117   using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
   5118 
   5119   ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
   5120   BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
   5121   bool Changed = false;
   5122   for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
   5123     ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
   5124     BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
   5125 
   5126     // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
   5127     // value rather than the switch condition variable:
   5128     //   switchbb:
   5129     //   switch i32 %x, label %default [
   5130     //     i32 17, label %succ
   5131     //   ...
   5132     //   succ:
   5133     //     %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
   5134     // -->
   5135     //     %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
   5136 
   5137     for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
   5138       // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
   5139       // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
   5140       // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
   5141       // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
   5142       // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
   5143       int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
   5144       if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
   5145           count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
   5146         Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
   5147         Changed = true;
   5148       }
   5149     }
   5150 
   5151     // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
   5152     int PhiIdx;
   5153     if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
   5154       ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
   5155   }
   5156 
   5157   for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
   5158     PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
   5159     SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
   5160     if (Indexes.size() < 2)
   5161       continue;
   5162 
   5163     for (int Index : Indexes)
   5164       Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
   5165     Changed = true;
   5166   }
   5167 
   5168   return Changed;
   5169 }
   5170 
   5171 /// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
   5172 /// initializing an array of constants like C.
   5173 static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   5174   if (C->isThreadDependent())
   5175     return false;
   5176   if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
   5177     return false;
   5178 
   5179   if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
   5180       !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
   5181       !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
   5182     return false;
   5183 
   5184   if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
   5185     if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
   5186       return false;
   5187     if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
   5188       return false;
   5189   }
   5190 
   5191   if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
   5192     return false;
   5193 
   5194   return true;
   5195 }
   5196 
   5197 /// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
   5198 /// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
   5199 static Constant *
   5200 LookupConstant(Value *V,
   5201                const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
   5202   if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
   5203     return C;
   5204   return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
   5205 }
   5206 
   5207 /// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
   5208 /// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
   5209 /// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
   5210 /// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
   5211 static Constant *
   5212 ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
   5213              const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
   5214   if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
   5215     Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
   5216     if (!A)
   5217       return nullptr;
   5218     if (A->isAllOnesValue())
   5219       return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
   5220     if (A->isNullValue())
   5221       return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
   5222     return nullptr;
   5223   }
   5224 
   5225   SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
   5226   for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
   5227     if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
   5228       COps.push_back(A);
   5229     else
   5230       return nullptr;
   5231   }
   5232 
   5233   if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
   5234     return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
   5235                                            COps[1], DL);
   5236   }
   5237 
   5238   return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
   5239 }
   5240 
   5241 /// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
   5242 /// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
   5243 /// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
   5244 /// case), of a switch instruction SI.
   5245 static bool
   5246 GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
   5247                BasicBlock **CommonDest,
   5248                SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
   5249                const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   5250   // The block from which we enter the common destination.
   5251   BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
   5252 
   5253   // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
   5254   // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
   5255   SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
   5256   ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
   5257   for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
   5258     if (I.isTerminator()) {
   5259       // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
   5260       if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
   5261         return false;
   5262       Pred = CaseDest;
   5263       CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
   5264     } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
   5265       // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
   5266 
   5267       // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
   5268       // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
   5269       // no longer dominate all its uses.
   5270       for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
   5271         User *User = Use.getUser();
   5272         if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
   5273           if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
   5274             continue;
   5275         if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
   5276           if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
   5277             continue;
   5278         return false;
   5279       }
   5280 
   5281       ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
   5282     } else {
   5283       break;
   5284     }
   5285   }
   5286 
   5287   // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
   5288   if (!*CommonDest)
   5289     *CommonDest = CaseDest;
   5290   // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
   5291   if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
   5292     return false;
   5293 
   5294   // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
   5295   for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
   5296     int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
   5297     if (Idx == -1)
   5298       continue;
   5299 
   5300     Constant *ConstVal =
   5301         LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
   5302     if (!ConstVal)
   5303       return false;
   5304 
   5305     // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
   5306     if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
   5307       return false;
   5308 
   5309     Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
   5310   }
   5311 
   5312   return Res.size() > 0;
   5313 }
   5314 
   5315 // Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
   5316 // Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
   5317 static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
   5318                                  SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
   5319                                  Constant *Result) {
   5320   for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
   5321     if (I.first == Result) {
   5322       I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
   5323       return I.second.size();
   5324     }
   5325   }
   5326   UniqueResults.push_back(
   5327       std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
   5328   return 1;
   5329 }
   5330 
   5331 // Helper function that initializes a map containing
   5332 // results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
   5333 // instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
   5334 // there is not a common destination block for the switch.
   5335 static bool
   5336 InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
   5337                       SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
   5338                       Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
   5339                       const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
   5340                       uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
   5341   for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
   5342     ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
   5343 
   5344     // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
   5345     SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
   5346     if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
   5347                         DL, TTI))
   5348       return false;
   5349 
   5350     // Only one value per case is permitted.
   5351     if (Results.size() > 1)
   5352       return false;
   5353 
   5354     // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
   5355     const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
   5356         MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
   5357 
   5358     // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
   5359     if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
   5360       return false;
   5361 
   5362     // Early out if there are too many unique results.
   5363     if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
   5364       return false;
   5365 
   5366     // Check the PHI consistency.
   5367     if (!PHI)
   5368       PHI = Results[0].first;
   5369     else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
   5370       return false;
   5371   }
   5372   // Find the default result value.
   5373   SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
   5374   BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
   5375   GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
   5376                  DL, TTI);
   5377   // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
   5378   // is unreachable.
   5379   DefaultResult =
   5380       DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
   5381   if ((!DefaultResult &&
   5382        !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
   5383     return false;
   5384 
   5385   return true;
   5386 }
   5387 
   5388 // Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
   5389 // two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
   5390 // Example:
   5391 // switch (a) {
   5392 //   case 10:                %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
   5393 //     return 10;            %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
   5394 //   case 20:        ---->   %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
   5395 //     return 2;             %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
   5396 //   default:
   5397 //     return 4;
   5398 // }
   5399 static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
   5400                                    Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
   5401                                    IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   5402   // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
   5403   // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
   5404   if (ResultVector.size() == 2 && ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
   5405       ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
   5406     ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
   5407     ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
   5408 
   5409     bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
   5410     Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
   5411     if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
   5412       Value *const ValueCompare =
   5413           Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
   5414       SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
   5415                                          DefaultResult, "switch.select");
   5416     }
   5417     Value *const ValueCompare =
   5418         Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
   5419     return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
   5420                                 SelectValue, "switch.select");
   5421   }
   5422 
   5423   // Handle the degenerate case where two cases have the same value.
   5424   if (ResultVector.size() == 1 && ResultVector[0].second.size() == 2 &&
   5425       DefaultResult) {
   5426     Value *Cmp1 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(
   5427         Condition, ResultVector[0].second[0], "switch.selectcmp.case1");
   5428     Value *Cmp2 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(
   5429         Condition, ResultVector[0].second[1], "switch.selectcmp.case2");
   5430     Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateOr(Cmp1, Cmp2, "switch.selectcmp");
   5431     return Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ResultVector[0].first, DefaultResult);
   5432   }
   5433 
   5434   return nullptr;
   5435 }
   5436 
   5437 // Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
   5438 // a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
   5439 static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
   5440                                               Value *SelectValue,
   5441                                               IRBuilder<> &Builder,
   5442                                               DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   5443   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   5444 
   5445   BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
   5446   BasicBlock *DestBB = PHI->getParent();
   5447 
   5448   if (DTU && !is_contained(predecessors(DestBB), SelectBB))
   5449     Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, SelectBB, DestBB});
   5450   Builder.CreateBr(DestBB);
   5451 
   5452   // Remove the switch.
   5453 
   5454   while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
   5455     PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
   5456   PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
   5457 
   5458   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 4> RemovedSuccessors;
   5459   for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
   5460     BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
   5461 
   5462     if (Succ == DestBB)
   5463       continue;
   5464     Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
   5465     if (DTU && RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ).second)
   5466       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SelectBB, Succ});
   5467   }
   5468   SI->eraseFromParent();
   5469   if (DTU)
   5470     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   5471 }
   5472 
   5473 /// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
   5474 /// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
   5475 /// constant values, replace the switch with select.
   5476 static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
   5477                            DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
   5478                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   5479   Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
   5480   PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
   5481   BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
   5482   Constant *DefaultResult;
   5483   SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
   5484   // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
   5485   if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
   5486                              DL, TTI, /*MaxUniqueResults*/2,
   5487                              /*MaxCasesPerResult*/2))
   5488     return false;
   5489   assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
   5490 
   5491   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
   5492   Value *SelectValue =
   5493       ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
   5494   if (SelectValue) {
   5495     RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder, DTU);
   5496     return true;
   5497   }
   5498   // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
   5499   return false;
   5500 }
   5501 
   5502 namespace {
   5503 
   5504 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
   5505 class SwitchLookupTable {
   5506 public:
   5507   /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
   5508   /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
   5509   SwitchLookupTable(
   5510       Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
   5511       const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
   5512       Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
   5513 
   5514   /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
   5515   /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
   5516   Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
   5517 
   5518   /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
   5519   /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
   5520   static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
   5521                                  Type *ElementType);
   5522 
   5523 private:
   5524   // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
   5525   // different ways.
   5526   enum {
   5527     // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
   5528     // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
   5529     SingleValueKind,
   5530 
   5531     // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
   5532     // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
   5533     // and addition instead of a table lookup.
   5534     LinearMapKind,
   5535 
   5536     // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
   5537     // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
   5538     // shift and mask operations.
   5539     BitMapKind,
   5540 
   5541     // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
   5542     // instructions from the table.
   5543     ArrayKind
   5544   } Kind;
   5545 
   5546   // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
   5547   Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
   5548 
   5549   // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
   5550   ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
   5551   IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
   5552 
   5553   // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
   5554   ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
   5555   ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
   5556 
   5557   // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
   5558   GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
   5559 };
   5560 
   5561 } // end anonymous namespace
   5562 
   5563 SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
   5564     Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
   5565     const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
   5566     Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
   5567   assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
   5568   assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
   5569 
   5570   // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
   5571   SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
   5572 
   5573   Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
   5574 
   5575   // Build up the table contents.
   5576   SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
   5577   for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
   5578     ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
   5579     Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
   5580     assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
   5581 
   5582     uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
   5583     TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
   5584 
   5585     if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
   5586       SingleValue = nullptr;
   5587   }
   5588 
   5589   // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
   5590   if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
   5591     assert(DefaultValue &&
   5592            "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
   5593     assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
   5594     for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
   5595       if (!TableContents[I])
   5596         TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
   5597     }
   5598 
   5599     if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
   5600       SingleValue = nullptr;
   5601   }
   5602 
   5603   // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
   5604   // that single value.
   5605   if (SingleValue) {
   5606     Kind = SingleValueKind;
   5607     return;
   5608   }
   5609 
   5610   // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
   5611   // table index.
   5612   if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
   5613     bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
   5614     APInt PrevVal;
   5615     APInt DistToPrev;
   5616     assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
   5617     // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
   5618     for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
   5619       ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
   5620       if (!ConstVal) {
   5621         // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
   5622         // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
   5623         LinearMappingPossible = false;
   5624         break;
   5625       }
   5626       const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
   5627       if (I != 0) {
   5628         APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
   5629         if (I == 1) {
   5630           DistToPrev = Dist;
   5631         } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
   5632           LinearMappingPossible = false;
   5633           break;
   5634         }
   5635       }
   5636       PrevVal = Val;
   5637     }
   5638     if (LinearMappingPossible) {
   5639       LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
   5640       LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
   5641       Kind = LinearMapKind;
   5642       ++NumLinearMaps;
   5643       return;
   5644     }
   5645   }
   5646 
   5647   // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
   5648   if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
   5649     IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
   5650     APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
   5651     for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
   5652       TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
   5653       // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
   5654       if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
   5655         ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
   5656         TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
   5657       }
   5658     }
   5659     BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
   5660     BitMapElementTy = IT;
   5661     Kind = BitMapKind;
   5662     ++NumBitMaps;
   5663     return;
   5664   }
   5665 
   5666   // Store the table in an array.
   5667   ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
   5668   Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
   5669 
   5670   Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*isConstant=*/true,
   5671                              GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
   5672                              "switch.table." + FuncName);
   5673   Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
   5674   // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
   5675   // value out of it.
   5676   Array->setAlignment(Align(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType)));
   5677   Kind = ArrayKind;
   5678 }
   5679 
   5680 Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   5681   switch (Kind) {
   5682   case SingleValueKind:
   5683     return SingleValue;
   5684   case LinearMapKind: {
   5685     // Derive the result value from the input value.
   5686     Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
   5687                                           false, "switch.idx.cast");
   5688     if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
   5689       Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
   5690     if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
   5691       Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
   5692     return Result;
   5693   }
   5694   case BitMapKind: {
   5695     // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
   5696     IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
   5697 
   5698     // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
   5699     // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
   5700     // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
   5701     Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
   5702 
   5703     // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
   5704     ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
   5705         ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
   5706         "switch.shiftamt");
   5707 
   5708     // Shift down.
   5709     Value *DownShifted =
   5710         Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
   5711     // Mask off.
   5712     return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
   5713   }
   5714   case ArrayKind: {
   5715     // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
   5716     IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
   5717     uint64_t TableSize =
   5718         Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
   5719     if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
   5720       Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
   5721           Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
   5722           "switch.tableidx.zext");
   5723 
   5724     Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
   5725     Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
   5726                                            GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
   5727     return Builder.CreateLoad(
   5728         cast<ArrayType>(Array->getValueType())->getElementType(), GEP,
   5729         "switch.load");
   5730   }
   5731   }
   5732   llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
   5733 }
   5734 
   5735 bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
   5736                                            uint64_t TableSize,
   5737                                            Type *ElementType) {
   5738   auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
   5739   if (!IT)
   5740     return false;
   5741   // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
   5742   // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
   5743 
   5744   // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
   5745   if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
   5746     return false;
   5747   return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
   5748 }
   5749 
   5750 /// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
   5751 /// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
   5752 static bool
   5753 ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
   5754                        const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
   5755                        const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
   5756   if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
   5757     return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
   5758 
   5759   bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
   5760   bool HasIllegalType = false;
   5761   for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
   5762     Type *Ty = I.second;
   5763 
   5764     // Saturate this flag to true.
   5765     HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
   5766 
   5767     // Saturate this flag to false.
   5768     AllTablesFitInRegister =
   5769         AllTablesFitInRegister &&
   5770         SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
   5771 
   5772     // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
   5773     // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
   5774     // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
   5775     if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
   5776       break;
   5777   }
   5778 
   5779   // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
   5780   if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
   5781     return true;
   5782 
   5783   // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
   5784   if (HasIllegalType)
   5785     return false;
   5786 
   5787   // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
   5788   // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
   5789   // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
   5790   return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
   5791 }
   5792 
   5793 /// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
   5794 /// \code
   5795 ///     if (idx < tablesize)
   5796 ///        r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
   5797 ///     else
   5798 ///        r = default_value;
   5799 ///     if (r != default_value)
   5800 ///        ...
   5801 /// \endcode
   5802 /// Is optimized to:
   5803 /// \code
   5804 ///     cond = idx < tablesize;
   5805 ///     if (cond)
   5806 ///        r = table[idx];
   5807 ///     else
   5808 ///        r = default_value;
   5809 ///     if (cond)
   5810 ///        ...
   5811 /// \endcode
   5812 /// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
   5813 static void reuseTableCompare(
   5814     User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
   5815     Constant *DefaultValue,
   5816     const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
   5817   ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
   5818   if (!CmpInst)
   5819     return;
   5820 
   5821   // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
   5822   // threading can do its work afterwards.
   5823   if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
   5824     return;
   5825 
   5826   Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
   5827   if (!CmpOp1)
   5828     return;
   5829 
   5830   Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
   5831   Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
   5832   Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
   5833 
   5834   // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
   5835   Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
   5836                                                  DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
   5837   if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
   5838     return;
   5839 
   5840   // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
   5841   // compare result.
   5842   for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
   5843     Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
   5844                                                 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
   5845     if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
   5846       return;
   5847     assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
   5848            "Expect true or false as compare result.");
   5849   }
   5850 
   5851   // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
   5852   // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
   5853   // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
   5854   // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
   5855   BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
   5856   for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(PhiBlock)) {
   5857     if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
   5858       return;
   5859   }
   5860 
   5861   if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
   5862     // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
   5863     CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
   5864     ++NumTableCmpReuses;
   5865   } else {
   5866     // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
   5867     Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
   5868         RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
   5869         RangeCheckBranch);
   5870     CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
   5871     ++NumTableCmpReuses;
   5872   }
   5873 }
   5874 
   5875 /// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
   5876 /// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
   5877 /// lookup tables.
   5878 static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
   5879                                 DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
   5880                                 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   5881   assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
   5882 
   5883   BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
   5884   Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
   5885   // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
   5886   // attribute is not set.
   5887   if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
   5888       (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsBool()))
   5889     return false;
   5890 
   5891   // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
   5892   // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
   5893 
   5894   // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
   5895   // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
   5896   // string and lookup indices into that.
   5897 
   5898   // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
   5899   // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
   5900   if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
   5901     return false;
   5902 
   5903   // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
   5904   // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
   5905   assert(!SI->cases().empty());
   5906   SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
   5907   ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
   5908   ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
   5909 
   5910   BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
   5911 
   5912   using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
   5913   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
   5914 
   5915   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
   5916   SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
   5917   SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
   5918 
   5919   for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
   5920     ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
   5921     if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
   5922       MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
   5923     if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
   5924       MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
   5925 
   5926     // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
   5927     using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
   5928     ResultsTy Results;
   5929     if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
   5930                         Results, DL, TTI))
   5931       return false;
   5932 
   5933     // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
   5934     for (const auto &I : Results) {
   5935       PHINode *PHI = I.first;
   5936       Constant *Value = I.second;
   5937       if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
   5938         PHIs.push_back(PHI);
   5939       ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
   5940     }
   5941   }
   5942 
   5943   // Keep track of the result types.
   5944   for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
   5945     ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
   5946   }
   5947 
   5948   uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
   5949   APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
   5950   uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
   5951   bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
   5952 
   5953   // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
   5954   // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
   5955   SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
   5956   bool HasDefaultResults =
   5957       GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
   5958                      DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
   5959 
   5960   bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
   5961   if (NeedMask) {
   5962     // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
   5963     if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
   5964       return false;
   5965     if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
   5966       return false;
   5967   }
   5968 
   5969   for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
   5970     PHINode *PHI = I.first;
   5971     Constant *Result = I.second;
   5972     DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
   5973   }
   5974 
   5975   if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
   5976     return false;
   5977 
   5978   std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   5979 
   5980   // Create the BB that does the lookups.
   5981   Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
   5982   BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
   5983       Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
   5984 
   5985   // Compute the table index value.
   5986   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
   5987   Value *TableIndex;
   5988   if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
   5989     TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
   5990   else
   5991     TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
   5992                                    "switch.tableidx");
   5993 
   5994   // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
   5995   // switching upon.
   5996   unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
   5997   uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
   5998   assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
   5999          "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
   6000          "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
   6001 
   6002   // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
   6003   // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
   6004   // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
   6005   const bool DefaultIsReachable =
   6006       !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
   6007   const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
   6008   BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
   6009 
   6010   if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
   6011     Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
   6012     if (DTU)
   6013       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
   6014     // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
   6015     // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
   6016   } else {
   6017     Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
   6018         TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
   6019     RangeCheckBranch =
   6020         Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
   6021     if (DTU)
   6022       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
   6023   }
   6024 
   6025   // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
   6026   Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
   6027 
   6028   if (NeedMask) {
   6029     // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
   6030     // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
   6031     BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
   6032     MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
   6033     LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
   6034                                   CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
   6035 
   6036     // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
   6037     // unnecessary illegal types.
   6038     uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
   6039     APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
   6040     APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
   6041     // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
   6042     const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
   6043     for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
   6044       uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
   6045                          .getLimitedValue();
   6046       MaskInt |= One << Idx;
   6047     }
   6048     ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
   6049 
   6050     // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
   6051     // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
   6052     // else continue with table lookup.
   6053     IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
   6054     Value *MaskIndex =
   6055         Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
   6056     Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
   6057     Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
   6058         Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
   6059     Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
   6060     if (DTU) {
   6061       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, LookupBB});
   6062       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
   6063     }
   6064     Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
   6065     AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, BB);
   6066   }
   6067 
   6068   if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
   6069     // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
   6070     // do not delete PHINodes here.
   6071     SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(BB,
   6072                                             /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
   6073     if (DTU)
   6074       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
   6075   }
   6076 
   6077   bool ReturnedEarly = false;
   6078   for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
   6079     const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
   6080 
   6081     // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
   6082     Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
   6083     StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
   6084     SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
   6085                             FuncName);
   6086 
   6087     Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
   6088 
   6089     // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
   6090     // do that right here.
   6091     if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
   6092         PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
   6093       Builder.CreateRet(Result);
   6094       ReturnedEarly = true;
   6095       break;
   6096     }
   6097 
   6098     // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
   6099     // possible.
   6100     if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
   6101       BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
   6102       // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
   6103       for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
   6104         reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
   6105       }
   6106     }
   6107 
   6108     PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
   6109   }
   6110 
   6111   if (!ReturnedEarly) {
   6112     Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
   6113     if (DTU)
   6114       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, LookupBB, CommonDest});
   6115   }
   6116 
   6117   // Remove the switch.
   6118   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccessors;
   6119   for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
   6120     BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
   6121 
   6122     if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
   6123       continue;
   6124     Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
   6125     RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ);
   6126   }
   6127   SI->eraseFromParent();
   6128 
   6129   if (DTU) {
   6130     for (BasicBlock *RemovedSuccessor : RemovedSuccessors)
   6131       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSuccessor});
   6132     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   6133   }
   6134 
   6135   ++NumLookupTables;
   6136   if (NeedMask)
   6137     ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
   6138   return true;
   6139 }
   6140 
   6141 static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
   6142   // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
   6143   uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
   6144   uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
   6145   uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
   6146   // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
   6147   uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
   6148 
   6149   return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
   6150 }
   6151 
   6152 /// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
   6153 /// of cases.
   6154 ///
   6155 /// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
   6156 /// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
   6157 ///
   6158 /// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
   6159 /// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
   6160 static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
   6161                               const DataLayout &DL,
   6162                               const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
   6163   auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
   6164   if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
   6165       !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
   6166     return false;
   6167   // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
   6168   // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
   6169   if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
   6170     return false;
   6171 
   6172   // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
   6173   // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
   6174   // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
   6175   // as signed.
   6176   SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
   6177   for (auto &C : SI->cases())
   6178     Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
   6179   llvm::sort(Values);
   6180 
   6181   // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
   6182   if (isSwitchDense(Values))
   6183     return false;
   6184 
   6185   // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
   6186   int64_t Base = Values[0];
   6187   for (auto &V : Values)
   6188     V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
   6189 
   6190   // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
   6191   // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
   6192   // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
   6193 
   6194   // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it
   6195   // results in a single rotate operation being inserted.
   6196   // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
   6197   // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
   6198   // as the key function.
   6199 
   6200   // countTrailingZeros(0) returns 64. As Values is guaranteed to have more than
   6201   // one element and LLVM disallows duplicate cases, Shift is guaranteed to be
   6202   // less than 64.
   6203   unsigned Shift = 64;
   6204   for (auto &V : Values)
   6205     Shift = std::min(Shift, countTrailingZeros((uint64_t)V));
   6206   assert(Shift < 64);
   6207   if (Shift > 0)
   6208     for (auto &V : Values)
   6209       V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
   6210 
   6211   if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
   6212     // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
   6213     return false;
   6214 
   6215   // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
   6216   // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
   6217   //   C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
   6218   // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
   6219   //
   6220   // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
   6221   // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
   6222   // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
   6223   // default case.
   6224 
   6225   auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
   6226   Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
   6227   auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
   6228   auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
   6229   auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
   6230   auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
   6231   auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
   6232   SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
   6233 
   6234   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
   6235     auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
   6236     auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
   6237     Case.setValue(
   6238         cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
   6239   }
   6240   return true;
   6241 }
   6242 
   6243 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   6244   BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
   6245 
   6246   if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
   6247     // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
   6248     // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
   6249     if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
   6250       if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
   6251         return requestResimplify();
   6252 
   6253     Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
   6254     if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
   6255       if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
   6256         return requestResimplify();
   6257 
   6258     // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
   6259     // away into any preds.
   6260     if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
   6261       if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
   6262         return requestResimplify();
   6263   }
   6264 
   6265   // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
   6266   if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
   6267     return requestResimplify();
   6268 
   6269   // Remove unreachable cases.
   6270   if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DTU, Options.AC, DL))
   6271     return requestResimplify();
   6272 
   6273   if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
   6274     return requestResimplify();
   6275 
   6276   if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
   6277     return requestResimplify();
   6278 
   6279   // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
   6280   // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
   6281   // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
   6282   // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
   6283   // optimisation pipeline.
   6284   if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
   6285       SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
   6286     return requestResimplify();
   6287 
   6288   if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
   6289     return requestResimplify();
   6290 
   6291   return false;
   6292 }
   6293 
   6294 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
   6295   BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
   6296   bool Changed = false;
   6297 
   6298   // Eliminate redundant destinations.
   6299   SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
   6300   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccs;
   6301   for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
   6302     BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
   6303     if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
   6304       if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken())
   6305         RemovedSuccs.insert(Dest);
   6306       Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
   6307       IBI->removeDestination(i);
   6308       --i;
   6309       --e;
   6310       Changed = true;
   6311     }
   6312   }
   6313 
   6314   if (DTU) {
   6315     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   6316     Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
   6317     for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
   6318       Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSucc});
   6319     DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   6320   }
   6321 
   6322   if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
   6323     // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
   6324     new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
   6325     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
   6326     return true;
   6327   }
   6328 
   6329   if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
   6330     // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
   6331     BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
   6332     EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
   6333     return true;
   6334   }
   6335 
   6336   if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
   6337     if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
   6338       return requestResimplify();
   6339   }
   6340   return Changed;
   6341 }
   6342 
   6343 /// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
   6344 /// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with.  This
   6345 /// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
   6346 /// a shared handler.
   6347 ///
   6348 /// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
   6349 /// here.  That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere.  In
   6350 /// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
   6351 /// when dealing with exception dense code.  (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
   6352 /// sinking in this file)
   6353 ///
   6354 /// This is primarily a code size optimization.  We need to avoid performing
   6355 /// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
   6356 /// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning).  We do this by not
   6357 /// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi.  Since the same
   6358 /// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
   6359 /// specialize.  If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
   6360 ///
   6361 /// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
   6362 /// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
   6363 /// merged.  In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
   6364 static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
   6365                                  BasicBlock *BB, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   6366   auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
   6367   assert(Succ);
   6368   // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
   6369   // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
   6370   if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
   6371     return false;
   6372 
   6373   for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
   6374     if (BB == OtherPred)
   6375       continue;
   6376     BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
   6377     LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
   6378     if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
   6379       continue;
   6380     for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
   6381       ;
   6382     BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
   6383     if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
   6384       continue;
   6385 
   6386     std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
   6387 
   6388     // We've found an identical block.  Update our predecessors to take that
   6389     // path instead and make ourselves dead.
   6390     SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
   6391     for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
   6392       InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
   6393       assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
   6394              "unexpected successor");
   6395       II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
   6396       if (DTU) {
   6397         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, OtherPred});
   6398         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
   6399       }
   6400     }
   6401 
   6402     // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
   6403     // used to go through BB.  We need to delete it or update it.
   6404     for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
   6405       Instruction &Inst = *I;
   6406       I++;
   6407       if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
   6408         Inst.eraseFromParent();
   6409     }
   6410 
   6411     SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
   6412     for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
   6413       Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
   6414       if (DTU)
   6415         Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, Succ});
   6416     }
   6417 
   6418     IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
   6419     Builder.CreateUnreachable();
   6420     BI->eraseFromParent();
   6421     if (DTU)
   6422       DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
   6423     return true;
   6424   }
   6425   return false;
   6426 }
   6427 
   6428 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   6429   return Branch->isUnconditional() ? simplifyUncondBranch(Branch, Builder)
   6430                                    : simplifyCondBranch(Branch, Builder);
   6431 }
   6432 
   6433 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
   6434                                           IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   6435   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   6436   BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
   6437 
   6438   // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
   6439   // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
   6440   // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
   6441   // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
   6442   // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
   6443   // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
   6444   // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
   6445   bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
   6446       Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
   6447       (!LoopHeaders.empty() && BB->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(2) &&
   6448        (is_contained(LoopHeaders, BB) || is_contained(LoopHeaders, Succ)));
   6449   BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg(true)->getIterator();
   6450   if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
   6451       !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB, DTU))
   6452     return true;
   6453 
   6454   // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
   6455   // constant, try to simplify the block.
   6456   if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
   6457     if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
   6458       for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
   6459         ;
   6460       if (I->isTerminator() &&
   6461           tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
   6462         return true;
   6463     }
   6464 
   6465   // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
   6466   // equivalent.
   6467   if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
   6468     for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
   6469       ;
   6470     if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB, DTU))
   6471       return true;
   6472   }
   6473 
   6474   // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
   6475   // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
   6476   // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
   6477   // for PHI nodes in common successor.
   6478   if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
   6479                              Options.BonusInstThreshold))
   6480     return requestResimplify();
   6481   return false;
   6482 }
   6483 
   6484 static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
   6485   BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
   6486   for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
   6487     BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
   6488     if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
   6489       return nullptr;
   6490     PredPred = PPred;
   6491   }
   6492   return PredPred;
   6493 }
   6494 
   6495 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
   6496   BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
   6497   if (!Options.SimplifyCondBranch)
   6498     return false;
   6499 
   6500   // Conditional branch
   6501   if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
   6502     // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
   6503     // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
   6504     // switch.
   6505     if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
   6506       if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
   6507         return requestResimplify();
   6508 
   6509     // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
   6510     // Ignore dbg and pseudo intrinsics.
   6511     auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true).begin();
   6512     if (&*I == BI) {
   6513       if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
   6514         return requestResimplify();
   6515     } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
   6516       ++I;
   6517       if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
   6518         return requestResimplify();
   6519     }
   6520   }
   6521 
   6522   // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
   6523   if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
   6524     return true;
   6525 
   6526   // If this basic block has dominating predecessor blocks and the dominating
   6527   // blocks' conditions imply BI's condition, we know the direction of BI.
   6528   Optional<bool> Imp = isImpliedByDomCondition(BI->getCondition(), BI, DL);
   6529   if (Imp) {
   6530     // Turn this into a branch on constant.
   6531     auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
   6532     ConstantInt *TorF = *Imp ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
   6533                              : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
   6534     BI->setCondition(TorF);
   6535     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
   6536     return requestResimplify();
   6537   }
   6538 
   6539   // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
   6540   // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
   6541   // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
   6542   if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
   6543                              Options.BonusInstThreshold))
   6544     return requestResimplify();
   6545 
   6546   // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
   6547   // from BI.  We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
   6548   // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks.  If so, we
   6549   // can hoist it up to the branching block.
   6550   if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
   6551     if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
   6552       if (HoistCommon &&
   6553           HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI, !Options.HoistCommonInsts))
   6554         return requestResimplify();
   6555     } else {
   6556       // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
   6557       // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
   6558       Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
   6559       if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
   6560           Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
   6561         if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
   6562           return requestResimplify();
   6563     }
   6564   } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
   6565     // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
   6566     // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
   6567     Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
   6568     if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
   6569         Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
   6570       if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
   6571         return requestResimplify();
   6572   }
   6573 
   6574   // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
   6575   // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
   6576   if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
   6577     if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
   6578       if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DTU, DL, Options.AC))
   6579         return requestResimplify();
   6580 
   6581   // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
   6582   for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(BB))
   6583     if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
   6584       if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
   6585         if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
   6586           return requestResimplify();
   6587 
   6588   // Look for diamond patterns.
   6589   if (MergeCondStores)
   6590     if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
   6591       if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
   6592         if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
   6593           if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
   6594             return requestResimplify();
   6595 
   6596   return false;
   6597 }
   6598 
   6599 /// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
   6600 static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified) {
   6601   Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
   6602   if (!C)
   6603     return false;
   6604 
   6605   if (I->use_empty())
   6606     return false;
   6607 
   6608   if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
   6609     // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
   6610     User *Use = *I->user_begin();
   6611 
   6612     // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
   6613     // control flow (eg. calls)
   6614     for (BasicBlock::iterator
   6615              i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
   6616              UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
   6617          i != UI; ++i) {
   6618       if (i == I->getParent()->end())
   6619         return false;
   6620       if (!isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&*i))
   6621         return false;
   6622     }
   6623 
   6624     // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
   6625     if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
   6626       if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I) {
   6627         if (!GEP->isInBounds() || !GEP->hasAllZeroIndices())
   6628           PtrValueMayBeModified = true;
   6629         return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP, PtrValueMayBeModified);
   6630       }
   6631 
   6632     // Look through bitcasts.
   6633     if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
   6634       return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC, PtrValueMayBeModified);
   6635 
   6636     // Load from null is undefined.
   6637     if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
   6638       if (!LI->isVolatile())
   6639         return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
   6640                                      LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
   6641 
   6642     // Store to null is undefined.
   6643     if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
   6644       if (!SI->isVolatile())
   6645         return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
   6646                                       SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
   6647                SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
   6648 
   6649     if (auto *CB = dyn_cast<CallBase>(Use)) {
   6650       if (C->isNullValue() && NullPointerIsDefined(CB->getFunction()))
   6651         return false;
   6652       // A call to null is undefined.
   6653       if (CB->getCalledOperand() == I)
   6654         return true;
   6655 
   6656       if (C->isNullValue()) {
   6657         for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
   6658           if (Arg == I) {
   6659             unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
   6660             if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx) &&
   6661                 CB->paramHasAttr(ArgIdx, Attribute::NonNull)) {
   6662               // Passing null to a nonnnull+noundef argument is undefined.
   6663               return !PtrValueMayBeModified;
   6664             }
   6665           }
   6666       } else if (isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
   6667         // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
   6668         for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
   6669           if (Arg == I) {
   6670             unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
   6671             if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx)) {
   6672               // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
   6673               return true;
   6674             }
   6675           }
   6676       }
   6677     }
   6678   }
   6679   return false;
   6680 }
   6681 
   6682 /// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
   6683 /// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
   6684 static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB,
   6685                                               DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
   6686   for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
   6687     for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
   6688       if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
   6689         BasicBlock *Predecessor = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i);
   6690         Instruction *T = Predecessor->getTerminator();
   6691         IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
   6692         if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
   6693           BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
   6694           // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
   6695           // destination from conditional branches.
   6696           if (BI->isUnconditional())
   6697             Builder.CreateUnreachable();
   6698           else
   6699             Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
   6700                                                        : BI->getSuccessor(0));
   6701           BI->eraseFromParent();
   6702           if (DTU)
   6703             DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB}});
   6704           return true;
   6705         }
   6706         // TODO: SwitchInst.
   6707       }
   6708 
   6709   return false;
   6710 }
   6711 
   6712 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnceImpl(BasicBlock *BB) {
   6713   bool Changed = false;
   6714 
   6715   assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
   6716   assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
   6717 
   6718   // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
   6719   // or that just have themself as a predecessor.  These are unreachable.
   6720   if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
   6721       BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
   6722     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
   6723     DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
   6724     return true;
   6725   }
   6726 
   6727   // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
   6728   // away...
   6729   Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, /*DeleteDeadConditions=*/true,
   6730                                     /*TLI=*/nullptr, DTU);
   6731 
   6732   // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
   6733   Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
   6734 
   6735   // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
   6736   Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB, DTU);
   6737 
   6738   // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
   6739   // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
   6740   // if there are no PHI nodes.
   6741   if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB, DTU))
   6742     return true;
   6743 
   6744   if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
   6745     Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB, DTU);
   6746 
   6747   IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
   6748 
   6749   if (Options.FoldTwoEntryPHINode) {
   6750     // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
   6751     // eliminate it, do so now.
   6752     if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
   6753       if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
   6754         Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DTU, DL);
   6755   }
   6756 
   6757   Instruction *Terminator = BB->getTerminator();
   6758   Builder.SetInsertPoint(Terminator);
   6759   switch (Terminator->getOpcode()) {
   6760   case Instruction::Br:
   6761     Changed |= simplifyBranch(cast<BranchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
   6762     break;
   6763   case Instruction::Ret:
   6764     Changed |= simplifyReturn(cast<ReturnInst>(Terminator), Builder);
   6765     break;
   6766   case Instruction::Resume:
   6767     Changed |= simplifyResume(cast<ResumeInst>(Terminator), Builder);
   6768     break;
   6769   case Instruction::CleanupRet:
   6770     Changed |= simplifyCleanupReturn(cast<CleanupReturnInst>(Terminator));
   6771     break;
   6772   case Instruction::Switch:
   6773     Changed |= simplifySwitch(cast<SwitchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
   6774     break;
   6775   case Instruction::Unreachable:
   6776     Changed |= simplifyUnreachable(cast<UnreachableInst>(Terminator));
   6777     break;
   6778   case Instruction::IndirectBr:
   6779     Changed |= simplifyIndirectBr(cast<IndirectBrInst>(Terminator));
   6780     break;
   6781   }
   6782 
   6783   return Changed;
   6784 }
   6785 
   6786 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
   6787   bool Changed = simplifyOnceImpl(BB);
   6788 
   6789   return Changed;
   6790 }
   6791 
   6792 bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
   6793   bool Changed = false;
   6794 
   6795   // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
   6796   do {
   6797     Resimplify = false;
   6798 
   6799     // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
   6800     // another iteration is requested.
   6801     Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
   6802   } while (Resimplify);
   6803 
   6804   return Changed;
   6805 }
   6806 
   6807 bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
   6808                        DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
   6809                        ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders) {
   6810   return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, DTU, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
   6811                         Options)
   6812       .run(BB);
   6813 }
   6814